Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 152

Bristol-Myers Squibb

LAWRENCEVILLE, NJ

Module M & N
ADDENDUM 6

Construction Documents
Project Manual
This Issue comprises only a segment of the documentation for this project. As
Drawings and Specifications are issued, they must be compiled to form the total
documentation. Users are cautioned to use only the latest issue of each Document.
Refer to the Table of Contents and Drawing List for the Current Issue in effect.

June 5, 2018

HDR Project No. 10060811


Table of Contents
ISSUE #
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
1 00 01 09 PROJECT MANUAL - PREFACE
1 00 26 00 SUBSTITUTIONS PRIOR TO BIDDING
1 00 31 00 INFORMATIONAL DOCUMENTS
1 00 72 07 GENERAL CONDITIONS (GC 2007)
Add 4 00 73 10 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS (GC 2007)

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


1 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
Add 4 01 14 16 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS AND WORK RESTRICTIONS
1 01 23 04 CHANGES IN WORK
IFB 01 25 13 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES AFTER EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
1 01 26 13 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
1 01 29 01 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES (CM)
IFB 01 31 00 COORDINATION OF SYSTEM DISRUPTIONS AND SHUTDOWNS
1 01 31 11 SUSPENDED LOADING - COORDINATION AND LIMITATIONS
1 01 31 12 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR
1 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
1 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
1 01 32 26 PROGRESS REPORTS AND PHOTOS
1 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
IFB 01 35 34 PRODUCT OUTGASSING REQUIREMENTS FOR CLEANROOM
CONSTRUCTION
1 01 41 10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND DEFERRED APPROVALS
1 01 41 50 SEISMIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
Add 5R 01 41 60 WIND LOAD DESIGN CRITERIA
1 01 42 10 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY
1 01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Add 6 01 43 39 EXTERIOR MOCK-UPS
1 01 45 00 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL
1 01 45 23 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
1 01 50 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES, TEMPORARY CONTROLS AND UTILITIES
IFB 01 50 13 GENERAL CLEAN ZONE CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
Ext 01 56 39 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
1 01 57 19 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT CONTROLS
1 01 61 00 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
1 01 65 00 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE: MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Ext 01 71 16 MOBILIZATION
1 01 71 21 SPECIALTY ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS
1 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING
1 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
1 01 74 23 CLEANING
ELL A2 01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
ELL A1 01 76 00 PROTECTING INSTALLED WORK
1 01 77 01 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (CM)
1 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Add 4 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
1 01 78 43 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
1 01 79 00 SYSTEM DEMONSTRATIONS

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
Table of Contents - 1
ISSUE #
IFB 01 81 14 LEED v4 REQUIREMENTS
IFB 01 81 14a LEED PROJECT SCORECARD
1 01 81 21 INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT (IAQ) DURING CONSTRUCTION
1 01 81 22 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROTECTION BEFORE OCCUPANCY
IFB 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS


IFB 02 41 00 DEMOLITION
1 02 41 13 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
2 03 08 13 CONCRETE TESTING AND EVALUATION - OWNER
2 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK
2 03 15 23 EXPANSION JOINT SEALS IN CONCRETE
2 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING
Add 2 03 21 01 FIBROUS CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
2 03 31 00 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING
2 03 31 10 CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING AND CURING
2 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
Ext 03 41 00 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
Ext 04 05 05 COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY PROCEDURES
Ext 04 05 10 MASONRY CLEANING
Ext 04 05 13 PORTLAND CEMENT - LIME MORTAR AND GROUT
Ext 04 05 21 DOVETAIL SLOTS
Add 6 04 05 23 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
Ext 04 21 13 BRICK MASONRY
Ext 04 42 03 INDIANA LIMESTONE
Ext 04 72 00 CAST STONE

DIVISION 05 - METALS
2 05 05 05 GALVANIC CORROSION PROTECTION
2 05 12 10 STRUCTURAL STEEL
Add 3 05 31 23 METAL ROOF DECKING
2 05 36 00 COMPOSITE METAL FORM DECK
Ext 05 40 00 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
Ext 05 45 23 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT SYSTEM
Ext 05 50 10 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
Add 2 05 50 13 STEEL STAIRS AND RAILINGS
IFB 05 51 17 ALTERNATING TREAD DEVICE
Ext 05 51 40 METAL UTILITY STAIRS, PLATFORMS, AND CATWALKS
IFB 05 71 00 ORNAMENTAL STAIRS
IFB 05 73 13 GLASS SUPPORTED RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES


Ext 06 10 53 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Ext 06 11 10 WOOD FRAMING AND SHEATHING
ELL A1 06 16 43 GYPSUM SHEATHING
IFB 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY
IFB 06 42 00 WOOD PANELING
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
Table of Contents - 2
ISSUE #

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION


Ext 07 11 16 CEMENTITIOUS DAMPPROOFING
Ext 07 11 17 CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
Ext 07 16 04 CONCRETE FLOOR MOISTURE TESTING
Ext 07 16 05 WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
2 07 17 20 ACTIVE POLYMER GEOTEXTILE WATERPROOFING
2 07 17 21 THERMOPLASTIC POLYMER WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
Add 6 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION
Add 6 07 21 35 SPRAY APPLIED FIBER INSULATION
Ext 07 27 18 SELF-ADHERING AIR BARRIER - VAPOR PERMEABLE
Add 6 07 42 13 FOAM-FILLED METAL WALL PANELS
IFB 07 42 66 METAL SCREEN WALL PANELS
IFB 07 46 18 DRY JOINT METAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM
Add 5R 07 54 21 ADHERED FLEECE BACK PVC ROOFING
Add 5 07 54 25 FULLY ADHERED TPO ROOFING (DELETED)
Ext 07 62 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
ELL A1 07 72 33 ROOF HATCHES
ELL A1 07 81 16 FIREPROOFING
Ext 07 81 23 INTERIOR INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING (IFP)
Ext 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING
IFB 07 84 53 PERIMETER FIRE CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS
Ext 07 92 13 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
IFB 07 92 16 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
IFB 07 95 13 INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
ELL A1 07 95 14 EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVERS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
IFB 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL (HM) DOORS AND FRAMES
IFB 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
IFB 08 31 16 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
IFB 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS (CD)
IFB 08 41 18 INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
IFB 08 41 19 FIRE RATED INTERIOR GLAZED STEEL PARTITION SYSTEM
IFB 08 41 20 FIRE RATED INTERIOR GLAZED ALUMINUM PARTITION SYSTEM
IFB 08 41 26 ALL GLASS DOOR ENTRANCES
ELL A1 08 42 35 AUTOMATIC SECURITY REVOLVING DOORS
ELL A1 08 44 13 EXTERIOR CURTAIN WALL SYSTEMS (CWS)
Add 6 08 44 20 STEEL CURTAIN WALL
ELL A1 08 63 00 ALUMINUM FRAMED SKYLIGHT
Add 4 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
IFB 08 71 13 AUTOMATIC SWINGING DOOR OPERATORS
Add 6 08 81 23 EXTERIOR GLASS AND GLAZING
Add 4 08 81 26 INTERIOR GLASS AND GLAZING
IFB 08 84 13 DECORATIVE POLYMER FABRICATIONS
IFB 08 87 33 DECORATIVE FILM
Ext 08 91 00 ARCHITECTURAL LOUVERS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
IFB 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
IFB 09 29 00 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
IFB 09 30 00 TILE
IFB 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILING MATERIALS (AM)

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
Table of Contents - 3
ISSUE #
Add 6 09 54 23 METAL CEILING (ACB)
IFB 09 63 40 GRANITE FLOORING (GF)
IFB 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE (RB)
IFB 09 65 15 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING (RS)
IFB 09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
IFB 09 65 20 RUBBER STAIR TREAD (RST)
IFB 09 65 36 STATIC DISSIPATIVE RESILIENT TILE FLOORING (SDT)
IFB 09 67 13 WATERPROOF FLOORING (WPF)
IFB 09 67 26 SEAMLESS EPOXY FLOORING (EP)
IFB 09 68 13 CARPET TILE (CPT)
IFB 09 68 16 BROADLOOM CARPET (CPT)
IFB 09 73 13 SOFT WALL COVERING (WC)
IFB 09 77 15 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL (AWP)
Add 4 09 77 23 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS
IFB 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING
IFB 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Add 4 10 11 00 MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS (DELETED)
IFB 10 13 00 DIRECTORIES AND BULLETIN BOARDS
IFB 10 14 06 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES - INTERIOR
IFB 10 14 06a SIGNAGE MESSAGE SCHEDULE
IFB 10 14 06b A100 MODULES M&N AREA OF REFUGE SIGNS
IFB 10 14 06c SK-AG-01
IFB 10 14 23 SIGNS
IFB 10 21 12 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS
Add 4 10 21 18 SOLID POLYMER SHOWERS
IFB 10 22 21 MODULAR INTERIOR WALLS - LABS
Add 4 10 22 22 MODULAR INTERIOR WALLS - OFFICE
IFB 10 26 00 WALL PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
IFB 10 28 13 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
IFB 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
IFB 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS
IFB 10 56 26 MOTORIZED MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING
IFB 10 73 13 AWNINGS AND CANOPIES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
ELL A1 11 24 26 SAFETY TIE-BACKS
IFB 11 53 01 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
IFB 11 53 02 EXAMINATION AND TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
IFB 11 53 13 LABORATORY FUME HOODS AND EXHAUST DEVICES
IFB 11 53 43 LABORATORY SERVICE FITTINGS & FIXTURES
IFB 11 53 53 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS & LAMINAR FLOW BENCHES
IFB 11 53 63 LABORATORY STERILIZERS

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Add 4 12 24 00 WINDOW SHADES
IFB 12 25 09 WINDOW SHADE CONTROL SYSTEM
IFB 12 32 00 ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK
IFB 12 35 33 UPHOLSTERY FABRICS
IFB 12 35 53 LABORATORY CASEWORK AND OTHER FURNISHINGS
IFB 12 36 63 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS (SSF)

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
Table of Contents - 4
ISSUE #
IFB 12 36 65 ENGINEERED QUARTZ FABRICATIONS (EQF)
IFB 12 48 23 ENTRANCE GRIDS (EG)

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION


Add 4 13 21 14 CONTROLLED ENVIRONMENTAL ROOMS
IFB 13 48 00 ARCHITECTURAL SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
IFB 13 60 13 CLEAN ZONE CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
IFB 13 60 16 CLEANROOM PROTOCOL AND CLEANING
IFB 13 60 19 CLEANROOM CERTIFICATION
IFB 13 61 13 CLEANROOM PARTITION SYSTEMS (CRPS)
IFB 13 62 33 FAN FILTER UNITS (FFU)

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT


ELL A1 14 21 00 GEARLESS MRL TRACTION ELEVATORS - PASSENGER/SERVICE

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION


IFB 21 08 00 FIRE PROTECTION COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Add 4 21 10 00 STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Add 4 21 10 00a FM GLOBAL CONTRACTOR’S MATERIAL & TEST CERTIFICATE FOR
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Add 6 21 22 00 CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
IFB 22 01 09 PLUMBING RESTORATION AND RETROFIT
IFB 22 05 05 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
IFB 22 05 13 PLUMBING MOTORS AND DRIVES
IFB 22 05 19 PLUMBING THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES
IFB 22 05 29 PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Add 4 22 05 48 PLUMBING SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
IFB 22 05 53 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION
Add 4 22 05 75 DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS
IFB 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION
IFB 22 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
Add 6 22 10 05 BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS
Add 6 22 10 06 BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
Add 6 22 10 19 PIPING SPECIALTIES
IFB 22 14 29 WASTEWATER PUMPS
IFB 22 32 00 IN-COMING WATER FILTRATION SYSTEM
IFB 22 33 00 WATER HEATERS
Add 6 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Add 6 22 63 16 LABORATORY GAS EQUIPMENT
IFB 22 63 17 LIQUID NITROGEN SYSTEM
IFB 22 67 00 PURIFIED WATER GENERATING EQUIPMENT
IFB 22 67 05 PURIFIED WATER PIPING SYSTEM
IFB 22 67 13 LABORATORY PROCESS CHILLED WATER SYSTEM

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING


IFB 23 05 05 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
IFB 23 05 13 MOTORS AND DRIVES
ELL A2 23 05 15 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES AND CONTROLS
IFB 23 05 19 THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
Table of Contents - 5
ISSUE #
IFB 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
IFB 23 05 33 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM
IFB 23 05 45 ROOF CURBS AND SUPPORTS
IFB 23 05 48 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
IFB 23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Add 4 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Add 4 23 07 00 MECHANICAL INSULATION
IFB 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
Add 6 23 20 10 HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
IFB 23 22 10 HEATING AND COOLING PUMPS
IFB 23 25 10 CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT
Add 4 23 31 00 DUCTS
IFB 23 34 10 FANS AND VENTILATORS
IFB 23 36 10 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
IFB 27 37 13 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
IFB 23 41 13 AIR FILTERS
IFB 23 57 15 HEAT EXCHANGERS
ELL A2 23 75 17 CUSTOMIZED AIR HANDLING UNITS - FURNISH AND DELIVER
Ext 23 75 17a GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS SKETCHES
ELL A2 23 75 18 CUSTOMIZED AIR HANDLING UNITS - INSTALLATION
IFB 23 82 11 HEATING TERMINAL UNITS
IFB 23 82 16 AIR COILS
ELL A2 23 84 13 HUMIDIFIERS (DELETED)
IFB 23 82 19 FAN COIL UNITS

DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION


IFB 25 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS (BAS)
IFB 25 10 00 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
Add 4 25 30 00 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) FIELD EQUIPMENT
IFB 25 55 13 AIR QUALITY MONITORING SYSTEM
Add 4 25 90 00 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
Add 4 26 00 00 UTILITY TRENCH SPECIFICATIONS
IFB 26 00 50 INSTALLATION OF PRE-ORDERED OR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
IFB 26 01 09 ELECTRICAL RESTORATION AND RETROFIT
2 26 05 05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
IFB 26 05 13 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
IFB 26 05 15 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
IFB 26 05 19 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
IFB 26 05 33 SURFACE RACEWAYS
IFB 26 05 35 CONDUIT
IFB 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS
IFB 26 05 48 SEISMIC CONTROL
IFB 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
IFB 26 05 73 SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, ARC FLASH STUDIES
2 26 05 93 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND INSPECTION
IFB 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
IFB 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
IFB 26 11 13 ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND POWER APPARATUS
IFB 26 17 16 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
IFB 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
IFB 26 27 30 WIRING CONNECTIONS
IFB 26 32 15 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
Table of Contents - 6
ISSUE #
IFB 26 51 00 BUILDING LIGHTING
IFB 26 56 00 SITE LIGHTING
IFB 26 60 10 POWER CONDITIONING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Add 4 26 83 13 LOW VOLTAGE DE-ICING / SNOW MELTING SYSTEM IN CONCRETE

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
IFB 27 10 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
IFB 27 51 19 SOUND MASKING SYSTEM

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY


IFB 28 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY
IFB 28 10 00 CARD ACCESS AND SECURITY SYSTEM
IFB 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
Add 6 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
IFB 28 31 30 AIR SAMPLING SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
1 31 00 00 EARTHWORK
1 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING
1 31 14 13.23 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING
IFB 31 22 00 SITE GRADING (SITEWORK ONLY)
IFB 31 22 19.13 SPREADING AND GRADING TOPSOIL
1 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL (FOR UTILITY INSTALLATION)
1 31 23 16.26 ROCK REMOVAL
IFB 31 23 33 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
1 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS


IFB 32 05 19.19 GEOGRIDS FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Add 4 32 12 00 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
Add 4 Attachment 1: Grasstone Data Sheet
IFB 32 12 73 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
IFB 32 14 13 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS
IFB 32 15 00 AGGREGATE MOWSTRIP
IFB 32 16 13 CONCRETE CURBS & GUTTERS
IFB 32 17 23.17 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
IFB 32 32 23.13 SEGMENTAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY RETAINING WALLS
IFB 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES
IFB 32 93 00 PLANTS

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
IFB 33 05 13 MANHOLES, MANHOLE FRAMES, COVERS
1 33 10 00 WATER UTILITIES
1 33 31 00 SANITARY SEWERAGE PIPING
1 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
2 33 46 00 FOUNDATION AND UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE SYSTEM
IFB 33 70 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE

DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT


IFB 41 22 15 JIB CRANES
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
Table of Contents - 7
ISSUE #

KEY:
1 = Bid Issue 1, Site Preparation and Utility Relocation Package, dated 10/16/2017
2 = Bid Issue 2, Foundation and Steel, dated 11/3/2017
Add 2 = Foundation and Steel Addendum 2, dated 12/4/2017
Add 3 = Foundation and Steel Addendum 3, dated 1/8/2018
Ext = Exterior Package and Long Lead, dated 2/14/2018
ELL A1 = Exterior Package and Long Lead Addendum 1, dated 3/16/2018
ELL A2 = Exterior Package and Long Lead Addendum 2, dated 3/26/2018
IFB = Issue for Bid, dated 4/16/2018
Add 4 = Addendum 4, dated 5/11/2018
Add 5 = Addendum 5, dated 5/18/2018
Add 6 = Addendum 6, dated 6/5/2018

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
Table of Contents - 8
SECTION 01 43 39
EXTERIOR MOCK-UPS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Build each of the indicated mock-ups on site for review and approval before proceeding with
any construction that may be affected by the construction represented by a corresponding mock-
up.
B. Build interior mockup in room as directed by Architect. Provide all interiors and equipment for
review and approval prior to proceeding with any construction that may be affected by the
construction represented by this mockup.
1.2 PROCEDURE
A. Extent, size, form and primary components for Exterior Mockups are indicated on Drawings or
in Specifications.
B. Locate mock-up where approved by Owner.
C. Do not provide mock-up until corresponding product data, shop drawings, samples and other
preparatory submittals are approved.
D. Do not provide mock-up until specified Preinstallation Conferences related to mock-up
components are held.
E. Mock-up shall be rebuilt as necessary until approved by Architect.
F. After approval, mock-up shall remain and serve as the standard for judging acceptance or
rejection of the appearance characteristics and workmanship of corresponding construction.
G. After completion and acceptance of the corresponding construction, mock-up shall be removed
when directed by Architect unless approved mock-up has been located as part of permanent
construction.
H. Surrounding and other construction affected by mock-up construction or removal shall be
completed as indicated or, if construction is not indicated, site shall be restored to condition
existing before mock-up construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials used in initial mock-up construction shall comply as specified in applicable sections
for Work and as approved by submittal reviews.
B. Materials may be modified only to extent required for mock-up approval by Architect.
1. Modified materials shall comply with specified requirements but may differ in appearance
characteristics, such as color and texture.
C. Materials used in construction of approved mock-up construction shall be used in corresponding
permanent construction.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
EXTERIOR MOCK-UPS
01 43 39 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide initial mock-up construction by methods proposed for corresponding permanent
construction.
1. Comply with installation and application requirements for each component as specified in
section applicable for Work.
B. Methods of construction may be modified only to extent required for mock-up approval by
Architect.
1. Modified methods of construction shall comply with specified requirements as well as
approved details of workmanship.
C. Methods of construction used for approved mock-up construction shall be used in corresponding
permanent construction.
3.2 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE WALL MOCK-UP
A. Sections specifying components of this mock-up include but are not necessarily limited to the
following:
1. Section 04 05 05, Cold Weather Masonry Procedures.
2. Section 04 05 13, Cement and Lime Mortars.
3. Section 04 05 23, Masonry Accessories.
4. Section 04 21 13, Brick Masonry.
5. Section 04 42 03, Indiana Limestone.
6. Section 04 72 00, Cast Stone.
7. Section 05 50 10, Metal Fabrications.
8. Section 07 21 00, Building Insulation.
9. Section 07 27 18, Self-Adhering Air Barrier
10. Section 07 42 13, Foam Filled Metal Panels.
11. Section 07 92 13, Exterior Joint Sealants.
12. Section 08 44 13, Exterior Curtain Wall Systems
13. Section 08 44 20, Steel Curtain Wall.
14. Section 08 81 23, Exterior Glass and Glazing
15. Section 08 91 00, Architectural Louvers.
3.3 EXTERIOR CURTAIN WALL IN-PLACE MOCK-UP
A. Building N Compound Management corner curtain wall at the southwest corner.
B. Building N typical office bay curtain wall condition.
C. Building M fire rated curtain wall at southwest corner Collaboration Area.
D. Refer to testing requirements in Section 08 44 13 and Section 08 44 20.
3.4 INTERIOR TORSION SPRING METAL CEILING SYSTEM MOCK-UP
A. Sections specifying components of this mock-up include but are not necessarily limited to
the following:
1. Section 09 54 23, Metal Ceiling.
2. Section 21 10 00, Standpipe and Sprinkler Systems.
3. Section 23 37 13, Air Outlets and Inlets.
4. Section 26 51 00, Building Lighting.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
EXTERIOR MOCK-UPS
01 43 39 - 2
SECTION 04 05 23
MASONRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Masonry Accessories, as indicated, in
accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Responsibility:
1. Assume responsibility for design, manufacturing and installation of masonry accessories:
a. Comply with Section 01 71 21, Specialty Engineering requirements.
b. Load combinations as specified by the building code.
c. Where special loads only are shown, combine with typical loads or capacities.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM A240 Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
General Applications.
2. ASTM A580 Stainless Steel Wire.
3. ASTM A641 Zinc–Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
4. ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
5. ASTM D226 Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
C. Brick Industry Association (BIA):
1. Technical Notes.
D. TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5 – Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
E. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1.
F. Movement Joints:
1. Expansion Joints per BIA Technical Notes 18A.
2. Control Joints by NCMA Tek 10-2B.
G. LEED Requirements:
1. Refer to Section 01 81 14, LEED v4 Requirements, for additional performance requirements
that may apply to products specified in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. Provide samples of materials where specified.
B. Project Information:
1. Manufacturer literature for products proposed for use.
2. Engineering calculations anchors with special loading or connection requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Masonry Anchors:
1. Base:

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04 05 23 - 1
a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2. Optional:
a. Wire-Bond
B. Through-Wall Flashing:
1. Base:
a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2. Optional:
a. Prosoco
b. York Manufacturing
C. Metal Drip Plate:
1. Base:
a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
D. Termination Bars:
1. Base:
a. Tru-Fast Corporation.
2. Optional:
a. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
E. Cavity Protection Material:
1. Base:
a. Mortar Net Solutions
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint:
1. Base:
a. ZRC Worldwide
2. Optional:
a. Tnemec, Inc.
G. Compressible Filler:
1. Base:
a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
H. Air Barrier: Specified in Division 07.
I. Loose Lintels: Specified in Section 05 50 10.
J. Structural Steel Lintels and Shelf Angles: Specified in Section 05 12 00 or Section 05 12 10.
K. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design anchorage to meet Design Loads.
1. Wind Loads:
a. Wind Pressures as required per local building code based on wind speed, exposure
factor and importance factor noted in Structural Drawings.
2. Earthquake Loads:
a. Wall and wall components shall be designed to satisfy requirements of Building Code
and ASCE 7 Chapter 13 Seismic Design Requirements for Nonstructural Components
based on the Seismic Design Category, and Importance Factor listed on the structural
drawings.
3. Structural movements of building structure:
a. Inter-story drift caused by wind or earthquake forces.
1) h/400 or 1/2 IN maximum for wind
b. Live load deflection of the supporting members
1) Live Load L/600 or 3/8 IN maximum

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04 05 23 - 2
c. Load Transfer Limitations:
1) Building structural frame is designed for gravity loads of wall system to be
transferred to frame, floor by floor.
4. Develop details defining method of fastening throughout system.
5. Comply with provisions of ACI 530 and ACI 530.1, except where exceeded by
requirements of Contract Documents.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Masonry Veneer Anchors:
1. Lateral movement, out-of-plane:
a. Maximum free play: 1/16 IN .
b. Maximum deflection: 0.05 IN when exposed to a load of 100 LBS inward or outward.
2. Select wire ties to span cavity and provide a minimum embedment of 2 IN in masonry
facing.
3. Steel ties: Hot-dip Galvanized per ASTM A153, Class B2.
4. Masonry veneer anchors for metal stud back-up:
a. Tape Seal:
1) Use with Strap Anchors.
2) Peel-n-stick, self-healing where screws or prongs penetrate Air Retarder and
Sheathing.
3) Apply to substrate wall in continuous vertical strips prior to installation of strap
anchors.
4) Base Product: X-Seal Tape by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
b. Offset Strap-type Anchor:
1) Base Product: X-Seal Anchor by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2) 14 GA type 304 stainless steel
3) Depth of prongs: As required for application.
4) Minimum vertical movement: 3-1/2 IN total.
5) Wire Ties:
a) Base Product: Vee Byna-Tie by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
b) Type 304 stainless steel
c) Diameter:
(1) 3/16 IN
d) Length: As required for application.
6) Fasteners:
a) Base Product: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
b) Self-drilling
c) Type 304 stainless steel
d) Hex head, with washer flange
e) Neoprene sealing washer
5. Masonry Veneer Anchors – CIP Concrete Backup:
a. Utilize following type of anchor devices where masonry veneer is scheduled over cast-
in-place concrete back-up, including:
1) Cast-in-place concrete walls, columns, footings, spandrel beams.
b. Strap-type Anchor:
1) Base Product: DW10HS by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2) Mechanically attached
3) Installed to face of conventionally reinforced, cast-in-place concrete structural
elements including sheer walls, spandrel beams, and columns
4) 12 GA 2.8 MM hot dip, galvanized steel
5) Size: 3/4 IN x 7 IN
6) 4 IN of vertical adjustability
7) Wire Ties:
a) Hot Dip, galvanized steel

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04 05 23 - 3
b) Diameter: 3/16 IN .
c) Length: As required for conditions.
d) Base Product: Vee Byna-Tie by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
8) Fasteners:
a) Power-driven or expansion type
b) Hot dip, galvanized steel
c) Diameter: 1/4 IN
d) Embedment: 2 IN
e) Pull-out: 120 LBS per fastener
f) Minimum of 2 fasteners per anchor strap
6. Masonry veneer anchors – Steel columns and spandrel beams:
a. Use following anchor devices where masonry veneers bypass steel columns and
spandrel beams.
b. Offset Strap Anchor:
1) Base Product: 359FH by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2) Hot Dip, galvanized steel
3) Mechanically attach to steel column/beams.
4) Wire Ties:
a) Base Product: Vee Byna-Tie by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
b) Hot Dip Galvanized Steel
c) Diameter: 3/16 IN
d) Length: As required for conditions.
7. Masonry wall anchors:
a. Use the following type of anchor devices where terminal ends of masonry walls abut
steel columns:
b. Offset Strap anchor:
1) Base Product: 359-FH 359FW by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2) Hot Dip Galvanized Steel
3) Mechanically attach to steel column.
4) Wire tie:
a) Hot Dip, galvanized steel
b) Width: As required for width of CMU.
c) Length: 12 IN .
d) Diameter: 3/16 IN .
e) Base Product: 302W by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
B. Miscellaneous Anchorages:
1. Include miscellaneous anchorages as required or indicated to secure stone, architectural
precast concrete copings and sills and like components.
2. Type:
a. As indicated.
3. Material: Same as indicated for veneer anchors above.
C. Through Wall Flashing System:
1. Flexible Stainless Steel Flashing:
a. Polymeric fabric laminated to type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
b. Membrane Thickness: 40 MIL
c. Stainless Steel Thickness: 3 MIL
d. Width as required.
e. Non-asphaltic adhesive.
f. Base Product: Mighty-Flash SA by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
g. Corners and end dams:
1) 26 GA type 304 stainless steel
2) Provide at ends of runs, inside and outside corners. Weld inside and outside
corners and seams as pre-manufactured unit.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04 05 23 - 4
3) Base Product: Corners & End Dams by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2. Stainless Steel Drip Plate:
a. Base Product: DP-FTSA by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
b. Termination Bar:
1) Base Product: TB-100 Series by Trufast, LLC
2) Use to secure top edge of Flexible Membrane flashing to back-up wall.
3) Stainless steel or rigid plastic.
4) 1/8 IN x 1 IN x 10 FT .
c. Flashing Adhesive:
1) As recommended by manufacturer for bedding, sealing laps, and sealing to vertical
surfaces.
D. Cavity Vents and Weeps:
1. Head Vent:
a. Base Product: QV – Quadro-Vent by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
b. Polypropylene honeycomb vent/weep for head joints
c. Provides ventilation of cavity and weeping of cavity moisture while restricting ingress
of insects and debris.
d. Standard size: 3/8 x 2-1/2 x 3-3/8 IN
e. Color: Gray
E. Cavity Protection Materials:
1. Base Product: Mortar Net.
2. Non-directional nylon or polyester fiber:
3. Fabricated from 20 PCT post-consumer recycled polyester. (2 IN material)
4. Fabricated from 40 PCT pre-consumer recycled nylon and 60percent virgin nylon. (Less
than 2 IN material).
5. Thickness:
a. Provide thickness to fill cavity.
6. Height: 10 IN high.
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint:
1. Zinc rich paint for re-galvanizing welds and abrasions in galvanized steel.
2. Base Product: ZRC Galvilite by ZRC Worldwide.
3. Optional: Organic Zinc Coating 90-93 by Tnemec.
G. Compressible Filler:
1. Closed cell neoprene sponge
2. Thickness: 1/4 IN
3. Thickness: 3/8 IN
4. Base Product: NS by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Keep vertical joint behind weeps free of mortar.
B. Comply with provisions of ACI 530 and ACI 530.1, except where exceeded by requirements of
the contract documents.
C. Anchoring Masonry Veneers to Back-up:
1. Attach offset anchor straps to back-up wall.
a. Use types suitable for condition.
b. Apply flexible membrane flashing to walls prior to attachment of strap anchor.
c. Where masonry walls bypass concrete or steel structural elements including shear
walls, columns, and spandrel beams, anchor thereto with specialized anchors types
indicated.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04 05 23 - 5
2. Select wire ties of length to span cavity and provide a minimum embedment of 2 IN in
masonry facing.
a. Where cavity width exceeds 4-1/2 IN , increase wire ties to 1/4 IN diameter.
3. Provide minimum of one (1) anchor per 1.77 SQFT of wall area with vertical and
horizontal spacing not to exceed 16 IN OC.
a. Where stud spacing is less than 16 IN OC, stagger ties in alternating courses.
4. Where 2 IN thick masonry facing units are used as furring against columns or walls, anchor
furring units to backing with adjustable metal ties designed for condition.
D. Through-Wall Flashing: (At Brick Only)
1. Install to provide positive drainage of cavity moisture.
2. Coordinate with built in items and brick ledges.
3. Drip Plate:
a. Adhere to ledge angle or brick ledge with drip flange extending past face of masonry.
4. Flashing membrane:
a. Extend bottom edge of flashing over top surface of drip plate.
1) Terminate rubberized flashing membranes 1/2 IN from exterior face of wall.
2) Bond flashing to drip plate
3) Lap and bond flashing ends minimum 6 IN .
b. Extend top edge of flashing membrane up face of wall minimum 8 IN 6 IN above the
top of Cavity Protection.
c. Termination of top edge:
1) Metal stud with gypsum sheathing:
a) Bond flashing membrane directly to face of sheathing
b) Mechanically secure top edge with termination bar.
c) Lap air retarder 6 IN over flashing membrane
2) Masonry:
a) Install upper edge of flashing using a termination bar
b) Reglet may be used in lieu of termination bar
3) Cast-in-place concrete:
a) Secure upper edge of flashing with termination bar
b) Reglet may be used in lieu of termination bar
4) Caulk top edge of termination bar to wall.
d. Provide end dams.
5. Seal gap below ledge angles with backer and sealant.
6. Seal gap below relieving angles with compressible filler
7. Seal items penetrating through-wall flashing system
8. End Dams: (Refer to details on drawings)
a. Configuration:
1) Extend ends of flashing beyond openings.
2) Return flashing up into head joints
3) Bond to face of masonry units
4) Install sill after end dam is in place.
5) Minimum height at sides: 4 IN
6) Comply with BIA Tech Note 21B and 7
b. Provide end dams at following locations:
1) Jamb edges of sills for doors, windows, louvers and similar openings.
2) Jamb edges of lintels for doors, windows, louvers and similar openings.
3) Step flashing where flashing follows grade.
4) Terminal ends of masonry veneer walls.
9. Head Vents and Rope Wick combination:
a. Rope Wicks:
1) Minimum Length: 16 IN .
2) Set outer end of ropes flush with exposed face of masonry veneer.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04 05 23 - 6
3) Loose-lay inner end of ropes at bottom of cavity, running parallel to back face of
masonry veneer.
4) Leave rope wicks in place after mortar has set.
b. Locations:
1) Base of brick masonry cavity wall and through-wall flashings:
a) Rope Wicks:
(1) Locate in first brick course above through-wall flashing at base of wall.
(2) Space 16 IN O.C. horizontally.
b) Head Vent:
(1) Locate in second brick course above through wall flashing at base of wall.
(2) Install head vent at 24 IN O.C. horizontally.
2) Brick masonry cavity walls at shelf angles and through-wall flashing:
a) Rope Wicks:
(1) Locate in first brick course above shelf angle and through-wall flashing.
(2) Space 16 IN apart horizontally.
b) Head Vent:
(1) Locations:
(a) Locate in second brick course above shelf angle and through-wall
flashing.
(b) Locate in third brick course below shelf angle and through-wall
flashing:
(2) Install head vent at 24 IN apart horizontally.
(3) Align head vents installed above and below shelf angle and through-wall
flashing with each other.
3) Brick masonry cavity walls at continuous lintel angles and through-wall flashing:
a) Rope Wicks:
(1) Locate in first brick course above continuous lintel angle and through-wall
flashing.
(2) Space 16 IN apart horizontally.
b) Head Vent:
(1) Locate in second brick course above continuous lintel angle and through-
wall flashing.
(2) Install head vent at 24 IN apart horizontally.
4) Brick masonry joints at top of brick cavity wall:
a) Head Vent:
(1) Locate in second brick course below coping and through-wall flashing, or
metal cap flashing.
(2) Install head vent at 24 IN apart horizontally.
E. Cavity Protection Material:
1. Install per manufacturer's recommendations at ledge angles and bottom of wall and head of
openings.
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint:
1. Apply at welds of galvanized masonry accessories or where galvanic coating is missing or
damaged.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04 05 23 - 7
SECTION 07 21 00
BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Building Insulation in accordance
with provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Stadnards:
1. ASTM:
a. C518, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
b. C665, Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
c. C578, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
d. C739, Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Loose Fill Thermal Insulation.
e. C1289, Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board.
f. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
g. E90, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
h. E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
i. E136, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at
750 DEGC.
B. FM Design Requirements:
1. Provide FM approved version of Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) foam rigid board
insulation.
C. LEED Requirements:
1. Refer to Section 01 81 14, LEED v4 Requirements, for additional performance requirements
that may apply to products specified in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Typical vapor retarder termination details at openings in walls, penetrations, and head and
base of walls at floor and roof levels.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturers’ product data sheets, details and installation instructions including
components and accessories, indicating product is in compliance with specifications.
C. FM Product Data:
1. Submit Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) foam rigid board insulation , FM approved
version, for review prior to purchasing of material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Rigid Board Insulation Extruded Polystyrene (XPS):
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING INSULATION
07 21 00 - 1
1. Base:
a. Dow Chemical.
2. Optional:
a. Owens-Corning.
b. Pactiv Building Products.
B. Rigid Fiber Insulation:
1. Base:
a. Thermafiber, Inc., an Owens Corning company.
2. Optional:
a. Roxul Inc.
C. Mineral Fiber Spandrel Insulation:
1. Base:
a. Thermafiber, Inc., an Owens Corning company.
2. Optional:
a. Roxul.
b. Johns Manville.
D. Fiberglass Batt Insulation:
1. Base:
a. Owens-Corning.
2. Optional:
a. CertainTeed
b. Johns Manville.
c. Knauf Insulation.
E. Vapor Retarder (VR):
1. Base:
a. Griffolyn, Reef Industries.
2. Optional:
a. Lamtec.
F. Other Materials:
1. Base:
a. As indicated.
G. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Rigid Board Insulation - Extruded Polystyrene Foam (XPS): (FM approved version)
1. Minimum Compressive Strength:
a. 25 PSI . (type IV).
2. Minimum Surface Burning Characteristics per ASTM E84 and NFPA 268:
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: less than 450.
c. No ignition from radiant heat source.
3. Water vapor permeance per ASTM E96:
a. 1.50 perm , maximum.
4. Water absorption per ASTM D2842:
a. 0.3 PCT, maximum.
5. Thermal resistance per ASTM C518:
a. R-value of 5.0 per IN at 75 DEGF mean temperature.
6. Base Product:
a. Styrofoam by Dow.
7. Optional:
a. GreenGuard by Pactiv Corporation.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING INSULATION
07 21 00 - 2
b. Foamular by Owens Corning.
8. Minimum thickness: 2 IN or as otherwise shown or required.
9. Adhesives for adhering polystyrene insulation: As recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
10. Adhesives for adhering polystyrene in interior spaces: As recommended by manufacturer
with VOC content no greater than 50 G/L.
B. Color: Gray.Rigid Fiber Insulation:
1. Unfaced, non-combustible, water repellant, semi-rigid rock wool insulation board.
2. Temperature Resistance: Per ASTM C612.
a. Over 2000 DEGF .
3. Surface Burning Characteristics per ASTM E84.
a. Flame Spread: 0.
b. Smoke Developed: 0.
4. Moisture Resistance: Absorbs less 0.03 PCT by volume, per ASTM C1104.
5. R-value: 4.2 per IN .
6. Density: 4.5 PCF .
7. Non-corrosive per ASTM C665.
8. Thickness: As noted in drawings.
9. Base: Thermafiber RainBarrier 45 Insulation.
10. Optional: Roxul CavityRock MD.
11. Mechanical fasteners; impaling clips/pins:
a. Pronged hangers and slotted washers or arrow pointed hangers.
b. Size pins to fit insulation thickness.
c. Base Product: GEMCO as manufactured by Goodloe E. Moore.
1) Gemco pronged hanger with pronged washer.
12. Mastic for use with mechanical fasteners:
a. Base Product: As approved by fastener manufacturer.
C. Unfaced Fiberglass Batt Insulation:
1. Inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into flexible blankets or semi-rigid sheets.
2. Un-faced, Type I in accordance with ASTM C665.
3. Minimum Surface Burning Characteristics per ASTM E84: Flame Spread: <25; Smoke
Developed: <50.
4. Combustion characteristics: Noncombustible; unfaced per ASTM E136.
5. Manufactured without urea-formaldehyde binders.
3-5/8 IN R-13

6-1/2 IN R-19

8-1/4 IN R-25
10-1/4 IN R-30

13 IN R-38
6. Nominal Thickness / Thermal Resistance Value, measured at 75 DEGF :
a. Nominal Thickness: 6-1/4 IN 6-1/2 IN / R-19 .
D. Vapor Retarder (VR):
1. Three plies of low density polyethylene, bonded with two layers of scrim reinforcing.
2. Fire retardant type: Flame Spread 5/ Smoke developed 90 per ASTM E84.
3. Permeance: Not exceeding 0.015 Perm .
4. Puncture Strength: 54 LBS .
5. Base Product: Type 90 FR by Griffolyn.
6. Optional Product: R-3035HD by Lamtec.
7. Seaming Tape:
a. Self-adhering, asphaltic mastic.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING INSULATION
07 21 00 - 3
b. Base Product: Fab Tape by Griffolyn.
c. Optional Product: 491 FSK by American Biltrite, Inc.
8. Repair Tape, for punctures and other damaged areas:
a. Base Product: Griff Tape by Griffolyn.
b. Optional Products: Same products listed for optional seaming tapes.
E. Sheet Metal Vapor Retarder:
1. Minimum 24 GA galvanized steel sheet metal.
a. Continuous taping flange.
b. Size: As required.
c. Profile: As required.
2. Provide at interface of vapor retarder and steel structure adjacent to the exterior wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
B. Installation indicates acceptance of responsibility for performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Insulate full thickness over surfaces to be insulated.
2. Fit tightly around obstructions, fill voids.
3. Cover penetrations with insulation.
4. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation unless more stringent requirements
are specified.
5. Consult manufacturer’s technical representative if installation instructions are not
applicable.
6. Apply rigid insulation over 2 IN thickness in double layer with staggered joints to achieve
total thickness.
7. Do not use broken or torn pieces of insulation.
8. Provide minimum cover of 5/8 IN type X gypsum wallboard over exposed foam surfaces.
B. Un-Faced Batt Insulation and Vapor Retarder in exterior Stud Wall systems:
1. Installing Batts:
a. Friction fit un-faced batts between studs.
b. Tightly butt ends.
c. Where specified thickness of batts is less than the depth of framing, install retaining
devices to prevent sagging.
2. Installing Vapor Retarder:
a. Position vapor retarder over inside face of framing.
b. Install vapor retarder in 50 IN wide sheets.
c. Install vapor retarder vertically.
d. Install in continuous sheets, floor to structure above, without horizontal joints.
e. Vertical Seams:
1) Tape vertical edge of vapor retarder to stud.
2) Position subsequent adjoining sheet and continuously tape vertical edge to
preceding sheet.
f. Tape bottom and top edges to structure continuously.
g. Tape edges to window, door frames, and penetrations to maintain continuity.
3. Sealing vapor retarder to sheet metal vapor retarder continuous taping flange:
a. Include where wall adjoins steel columns, spandrel beams and similar structural steel
members, and where indicated.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING INSULATION
07 21 00 - 4
b. Install sheet metal vapor retarder continuous taping flange to flange of structural steel
members prior to application of fireproofing.
1) Seal to structure with urethane sealant and mechanical fasteners.
2) Protect flange with masking tape to prevent accumulation of fireproofing over-
spray.
3) Remove masking tape after fireproofing application.
c. Prior to installation of vapor retarder tape: Clean taping flange to remove oily residue
and remaining fireproofing over-spray, if present.
d. Continuously tape vapor retarder to previously installed taping flange.
1) Seal vapor retarder to taping flange continuously, using vapor retarder tape
specified.
2) Optional: Continuous clips may be used in lieu of tape.
a) Product: Finish Trim No. 3910 by Trim-Tex.
4. Sealing vapor retarder at other areas of discontinuity:
a. Prior to installation of gypsum wallboard or other covering:
1) Repair tears, flaw in seams and terminations with vapor retarder tape.
2) Seal vapor retarder to conduit, electrical boxes, piping and other penetrating items
using vapor retarder tape.
b. Continuously seal or tape vapor retarder sheets to abutting materials and penetrations
such as windows, doors, conduit, boxes, pipes or other items to maintain vapor
tightness.
c. Continuously seal joints or voids in abutting materials and penetrations with sealant or
tape as applicable to provide continuous vapor tightness.
C. Rigid Board (XPS) Insulation in cavity wall construction.
1. Verify vapor retarder and moisture barrier installation is complete.
2. Comply with manufacturer’s directions for particular conditions of installation.
3. Extend insulation full thickness in one layer over entire area to be insulated.
4. Install insulation over 2 IN thick in multiple layers. Stagger joints.
5. Adhere insulation to sheathing per insulation manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. Cut and fill tightly around penetrating elements and abutting construction.
7. Seal unavoidable joints at penetrations and voids with polyurethane spray foam
insulation to maintain R-value.
8. Tape joints.
D. Rigid Board Insulation (XPS) at foundations:
1. Extend down for distance indicated in one layer.
a. If not indicated, extend down to design frost line.
2. Install in mastic with tight joints on walls.
3. Protect from damage and/or displacement during backfilling.
4. Apply Concrete Faced Insulation Panel to exterior, exposed portions of foundation.
a. Install with concealed fasteners. Where exposed fasteners must be used, cover fastener
head with sealant.
b. Seal exposed insulation with manufacturer’s standard trim.
c. Seal joints between panels with concrete masonry sealant: See Section 07 92 13.
d. Miter outside corners and seal joint.
e. Finish exposed surfaces with Cementitious Dampproofing: See Section 07 11 16.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING INSULATION
07 21 00 - 5
SECTION 07 21 35
SPRAY APPLIED FIBER INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Spray-Applied Fiber Insulation in
accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications:
1. Firm with expertise in sprayed insulation, sprayed fireproofing or both.
2. Licensed or otherwise approved by insulation material manufacturer.
B. Comply with local code requirements and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. ASTM International:
1. ASTM C423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
2. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
3. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
D. FM Design Requirements:
1. Provide FM approved version of Spray Applied Fiber Insulation.
E. LEED Requirements:
1. Refer to Section 01 81 14, LEED v4 Requirements, for additional performance requirements
that may apply to products specified in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturers’ product data sheets, insulation properties, surface burning characteristics,
including components and accessories.
B. Samples:
1. 12 x 12 IN panel of Spray Applied Insulation on a rigid backing.
C. FM Product Data:
1. Submit Spray Applied Fiber Insulation, FM approved version, for review prior to
purchasing of material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Spray Applied Fiber Insulation:
1. Base:
a. ThermaCoustic Industries.
2. Optional:
a. Monoglass Incorporated.
b. International Cellulose Corporation.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
SPRAY APPLIED FIBER INSULATION
07 21 35 - 1
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Spray Applied Fiber Insulation: (FM approved version)
1. Base Product: TC-417 by ThermaCoustic Industries.
2. White glass fiber or treated cellulose fiber with synthetic emulsion adhesive.
3. Thickness: Apply at minimum thickness to provide R-30.
4. Products shall not contain free-crystalline silica, asbestos or combustible fibers.
5. Flame Spread: less than 25.
6. Smoke Developed: less than 450.
7. Sound Absorption: NRC 1.00 at 3 IN minimum thickness
8. Color: Grey.
9. Adhesive:
a. Mix in strict accord with manufacturer recommendation.
b. Adhesive shall have VOC content no greater than 70 g/L.
B. Protective Topcoat:
1. Base Product: AF90 by ThermaCoustic Industries.
2. Spray-apply surface protection coating where scheduled.
3. Color: As selected by Architect.
4. Protective topcoat shall have VOC content no greater than 100 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Make surfaces to receive spray insulation free of dust, dirt, grease, oil, loose scale, rust, and any
deleterious material that could impair bonding to surface.
B. Verify compatibility and bond requirements of surfaces to receive spray applied insulation.
C. Maintain proper temperature and ventilation during installation.
D. Protect equipment, fixtures and surfaces, not to receive insulation.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Mix and apply spray applied insulation in accord with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Apply product in sufficient thickness to achieve required thermal and acoustic value.
C. Apply with one-pass application procedure. Do not layer application.
D. Finishing:
1. Board-tamped and over-sprayed with adhesive.
a. Thickness: Adequate thickness to meet the specified acoustic values.
2. Spray apply surface protection coating where scheduled.
3.3 PROTECTION AND REPAIR
A. Protect installed materials from damage.
B. Repair damaged areas in a manner consistent with surrounding areas.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove overspray from equipment and surfaces not intended to be covered. Perform removal
work while installed product is still wet.
B. Leave area broom clean.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
SPRAY APPLIED FIBER INSULATION
07 21 35 - 2
SECTION 07 42 13
FOAM-FILLED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Foam Filled Metal Wall Panels, as
indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer or installer franchised or approved in writing by manufacturer.
B. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association:
1. AAMA 501.2 Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed
Storefronts, Curtainwall and Sloped Glazing Systems.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 285 Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of
Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components.
D. Provide Foam Filled Metal Wall Panels engineered to support dead, live, and lateral, wind or
seismic, loads indicated.
1. Comply with Section 01 71 21, Specialty Engineering Requirements.
2. Include headers and reinforcing members around openings.
3. Required details defining method of fastening throughout system and attachments to
supporting primary structure included in engineering requirement.
E. Products to meet applicable FM Design Approval Standards for installation location:
1. Class 4880.
2. Class 4881.
3. Class 4882.
F. Mock-up: As per mock-up drawing.
1. Construct mock-up wall assembly on site for Architect review.
a. Include standard horizontal, vertical joints as well as end conditions where occurs at
dissimilar materials.
b. Mockup wall to include:
1) Connection to adjacent construction.
2) Joint detail.
c. Mockup wall constitutes standard of quality for balance of cladding work.
d. If not acceptable, reconstruct.
e. Do not proceed with work until mock-up wall approved by Architect.
G. LEED Requirements:
1. Refer to Section 01 81 14, LEED v4 Requirements, for additional performance requirements
that may apply to products specified in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Elevations showing each insulated composite panel and attachment point.
2. Details of each condition of installation and attachment.
3. Details of each transition and termination.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FOAM-FILLED METAL WALL PANELS
07 42 13 - 1
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer’s data sheets for wall panels and accessories.
C. Samples:
1. Manufacturers complete range of colors for selection.
2. Three 4 x 6 IN samples of panel in finish selected by Architect.
3. Manufacturer’s standard and custom line of sealant colors for selection.
D. Project Information:
1. Structural calculations for Foam Filled Metal Wall Panels indicating design conforms to
specified design criteria, sealed by the Specialty Structural Engineer.
a. Submit concurrent with Shop Drawings.
2. Certification of installer qualifications.
3. Submit product specification information for FM review prior to purchasing of
materials.
E. Contract Closeout Information:
1. Field Water Infiltration Test reports.
2. Warranty.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide two (2) year warranty on wall panels, flashing, and associated work.
B. Warranty to cover waterproof integrity of panel system against leaks through wall.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Foam-filled Metal Wall Panel System:
1. Base:
a. Centria.
B. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design Loads:
1. Design Dry Joint Metal Panel Wall System and anchorage to meet Design Loads.
a. Wind Loads:
1) Wind Pressures as required per local building code based on wind speed, exposure
factor and importance factor noted in the Structural Drawings.
2) 20 PSF minimum.
b. Deflection Values: Use the most restrictive of the following:
1) Limit deflection to values specified for Uniform Design Load Test.
2) Limit deflection to comply with Building Code as locally adopted and amended.
3) Limit deflection to L/175 for span under 13FT-6 IN.
4) Limit deflection to L/240 + 1/4 IN for span over 13FT-6 IN.
B. Thermal Expansion and Structural Movement:
1. Expansion and contraction, caused by changes in surface temperature equal to DT (delta T).
a. Delta T for this project: 200 DEGF .
b. Thermal contraction/expansion in this range shall not cause buckling, stresses on glass,
failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners,
reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects over this temperature range.
c. Operating windows and doors shall function normally over this temperature range.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FOAM-FILLED METAL WALL PANELS
07 42 13 - 2
C. Structural movements of building structure:
1. Inter-story drift caused by wind or earthquake forces.
a. h/720 or 0.34 IN maximum.
2. Live load deflection of the supporting members.
a. L/240 or 0.375 IN maximum.
D. Drainage:
1. Design Foam Filled Metal Wall Panels to intercept, collect, contain, and drain water which
may infiltrate system to exterior.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Foam-filled Metal Wall Panels: (FM approved version)
1. Metal inner and outer panels with foam insulation.
2. Thickness: Minimum 2 IN .
3. Width: 24 IN .
4. Core: Foamed in place urethane or isocyanurate.
5. R Value: Minimum 14 .
6. ASTM-E84 flame spread: Under 75; smoke developed: Under 450; fuel contributed:
Under 50.
7. Edges: Interlocking double tongue and groove.
8. Joints: Factory caulked or gasketed.
9. Face sheets:
a. Exterior:
1) Minimum 22 GA G-90 galvanized steel.
2) Smooth, flat.
b. Interior:
1) Minimum 26 GA G-90 galvanized steel.
2) Non-directional embossed, flat.
3) Profile: Centria Formawall Dimension Series:
a) Flat Horizontal.
10. Finishes:
a. Exterior: Metallic 3-coat.
b. Exterior: Fluorofinish 2-coat, minimum 70 PCT Kynar/Hylar, Mica.
c. Interior: Primed with siliconized polyester finish.
d. Color: Centria Bronze 2, #9987 as selected.
B. Perimeter trim pieces, flashing and accessories:
1. Gauges to match exterior face sheet.
2. As necessary to complete panel installation.
3. Shop fabricated and insulated corners to match panels.
4. Match color and finish of wall panels.
C. Fastening system: Non-ferrous concealed in finished work.
D. Subgirts and supports: G60galvanized subgirts and intermediate support items as required for
installation.
1. Minimum 16 GA studs.
E. Architectural Louvers: Refer to Section 08 91 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify suitability of substrate to receive installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FOAM-FILLED METAL WALL PANELS
07 42 13 - 3
3.2 ERECTION
A. Erect system complete, per reviewed shop drawings.
B. Erect with concealed fasteners, locking entire unit to structural supports to prohibit negative pull
off under design loads.
3.3 WATER TEST
A. Upon completion of installation, test water penetration in accordance with AAMA Standard
AAMA 501.2.
1. Test entire surface.
2. Repair leaks.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide required temporary closures and flashings to maintain weather integrity, during and after
erection.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FOAM-FILLED METAL WALL PANELS
07 42 13 - 4
SECTION 08 44 20
STEEL CURTAIN WALL

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Steel Curtain Wall, as indicated, in
accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Section Includes:
1. Fire rated assembly.
C. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide Steel Curtain Wall engineered to support dead, live, and lateral, wind or seismic, loads
indicated.
1. Comply with Section 01 71 21, Specialty Engineering Requirements.
2. Include headers and reinforcing members around openings.
3. Required details defining method of fastening throughout system and attachments to
supporting primary structure included in engineering requirement.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM A1008/A1008M Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened.
2. ASTM A1011/A1011M Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.
3. ASTM E90 Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
4. ASTM E119 Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
5. ASTM E283 Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the
Specimen
6. ASTM E330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference Procedure A
7. ASTM E331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors,
and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
8. ASTM E413 Standard Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
9. ASTM E783 Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage through Installed Exterior
Windows and Doors
10. ASTM E1105 Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air
Pressure Difference
11. ASTM E2010 Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window
Assemblies.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
2. NFPA 251 Fire Tests of Building Construction & Materials
3. NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
4. NFPA 257 Fire Test of Window Assemblies

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
STEEL CURTAIN WALL
08 44 20 - 1
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. UL 9 Fire Tests of Window Assemblies
2. UL 10B Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
3. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door {and Window} Assemblies
4. UL 263 Fire tests of Building Construction and Materials
5. UL 752 Ratings of Bullet-Resistant Materials
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI Z97.1 Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
F. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1. AAMA 501.1 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors Using Dynamic Pressure
2. AAMA 501.2 Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed
Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems
G. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. Skilled and qualified welders, licensed as required in accordance with local building
regulations.
2. Comply with AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code.
H. LEED Requirements:
1. Refer to Section 01 81 14, LEED v4 Requirements, for additional performance requirements
that may apply to products specified in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Elevations, sections and details for review of support system to building frame.
2. Glazing Schedule: Use same designation indicated on Drawings and prepare a schedule
listing glass types and thickness for each size opening and location.
3. Indicate fire rated identification markings required for each fire rated condition.
B. Project Data:
1. Manufacturer product literature defining system specified.
C. Samples:
1. Sample of each specified frame.
2. Sample of each specified glass.
3. Manufacturer's standard line of PVDF finishes for color selection.
4. Sample of PVDF color selected.
5. Finish hardware and fastening items.
D. Project Information:
1. Structural calculations for Steel Curtain Wall indicating design conforms to specified design
criteria, sealed by the Specialty Structural Engineer in State of New Jersey.
a. Submit concurrent with Shop Drawings.
2. Certified independent laboratory test reports verifying compliance with performance
characteristics.
E. Contract Closeout Information:
1. Warranty.
2. Maintenance data.
F. Mock-up Wall:
1. Erect in-place a mock-up wall 2 bays wide and 2 stories high.
a. Install complete with glass, glazing, insulation, anchors and other components required
to create entire assembly.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
STEEL CURTAIN WALL
08 44 20 - 2
2. Perform field testing on mockup wall.
a. Evaluate appearance, anchorage, and weathertightness.
b. If unit is not acceptable, modify and/or remove and re-construct new mock-up wall and
retest, until assembly is accepted.
3. Accepted mock-up serves as standard of quality for remainder of curtain wall construction.
4. Accepted mock-up wall may be retained in place as a permanent part of the building.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Written five (5) year warranty signed jointly by manufacturer and installer, agreeing to repair or
replace failed work performed under this section from date of Substantial Completion.
1. Failure includes but not limited to:
a. Defects in materials, workmanship, water infiltration of assembly, air infiltration of
assembly, glazing, sealant or defects which influence system capacity to perform as a
weather tight envelope.
B. Finishes:
1. Manufacturer five (5) year warranty covering repair or replacement resulting from powder
coated finishes that fail within specified warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Curtain Wall:
1. Base:
a. Technical Glass Products (TGP).
2. Optional:
a. SaftiFirst.
b. Vetrotech.
B. Glazing:
1. Base:
a. Pilkington.
2. Optional:
a. SaftiFirst.
b. Vetrotech.
C. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design Loads:
1. Design Steel Curtain Wall and anchorage to meet Design Loads.
a. Wind loads: Use the most restrictive of the following:
1) Wind pressures as required per local building code based on wind speed, exposure
factor and importance factor noted in the Structural Drawings.
2) 20 PSF minimum.
b. Deflection values: Use the most restrictive of the following:
1) Limit deflection to values specified for Uniform Design Load Test.
2) Limit deflection to comply with Building Code as locally adopted and amended.
3) Limit deflection to L/175 or 3/4 IN maximum.
2. Thermal expansion and structural movement:
a. Expansion and contraction, caused by changes in surface temperature equal to delta T.
1) Delta T for this project: 200 DEG F.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
STEEL CURTAIN WALL
08 44 20 - 3
2) Thermal contraction/expansion in this range shall not cause buckling, stresses on
glass, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on
fasteners, reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects over this
temperature range.
3) Operating windows and doors shall function normally over this temperature range.
3. Structural movements of building structure:
a. Inter-story drift caused by wind or earthquake forces.
1) h/720 or 0.34 IN maximum.
b. Live load deflection of the supporting members.
1) L/240 or 0.375 IN maximum.
4. Drainage:
a. Design Wall System to intercept, collect, contain, and drain water which may infiltrate
system to exterior.
B. Test Requirements:
1. Test systems proposed for use on this project to ensure performance criteria is achieved.
a. Utilize independent testing laboratories specifically qualified to conduct performance
tests required.
b. Laboratory tests may be conducted in manufacturer's laboratories provided they are
witnessed and certified by qualified independent testing laboratory personnel.
2. Perform tests on full sized unit for project or minimum 2-storys high x 10 FT wide unit.
a. Mount specimen in test chamber in exact accordance with job conditions including
anchorage system, caulking, sealing, etc.
b. Unit for test to be completely assembled glazed unit.
c. Thermal tests may be conducted on a 4 FT x 6 FT unit.
d. Test air infiltration first, water resistance second.
e. Other tests may be in any order.
3. Preconstruction laboratory testing from certified lab is acceptable in lieu of job-specific
testing.
a. Lab Test Reports, indicating compliance with specified criteria must be based on a test
unit that accurately represents the product used on project.
4. Air Infiltration Test:
a. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM E283.
b. Maximum Air Infiltration:
1) Fixed wall areas: 0.06 CUFTM/FT2when tested at 6.24 PSF.
5. Water Resistance Tests:
a. Static:
1) Test specimen in accordance with ASTM E331.
2) No leakage at an air pressure differential of 15 PSF per AAMA 501.
b. Dynamic:
1) Test specimen in accordance with AAMA 501.1.
2) No leakage at an air pressure differential of 15 PSF.
6. Uniform Load Tests:
a. Test in accordance with ASTM E330.
1) Apply 40 PSF static air pressure load to the specimen in the positive and negative
direction.
a) Spans less than 13’-6”: No deflection in excess of L/175 of span of framing
members.
b) Spans greater than 13’-6” and less than 40 FT: No deflection in excess of
L/240 plus 1/4 IN of span of framing members.
2) Increase test load pressure to 60 PSF: No glass breakage or permanent set in
framing members in excess of 0.2 PCT of clear spans.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
STEEL CURTAIN WALL
08 44 20 - 4
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Steel Curtain Wall:
1. Fireframes Curtain Wall Series by Technical Glass Products (TGP).
2. UL Label: 60 minutes.
3. Steel Frame: Profiled steel tubing.
4. Face to Back Mullion Dimension: Match typical exterior adjacent curtain wall system.
5. Sizes, shapes and profiles as indicated.
a. Provide framing member wall thickness to meet specified structural performance
requirements.
b. Include internal reinforcing to meet Design Loads.
6. Water Drainage: Vertically weeped.
7. Pressure Plates: Formed stainless steel.
8. Cover Caps: Formed steel.
9. Aluminum: Per manufacturer recommendation for type of use and finish indicated.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B221/B221M.
10. Steel Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer:
a. Comply with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00.
b. Select and prepare surface in accordance with recommendations of applicable SSPC
standard.
11. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
12. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A611.
13. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A570/A570M.
14. Brackets and Reinforcements:
a. Manufacturer's high-strength aluminum units or,
b. Nonmagnetic stainless steel or,
c. Hot-dip galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM A386.
15. Fasteners:
a. Exposed: Stainless Steel.
b. Concealed: Compatible with materials being joined.
16. Provide countersunk phillips head screws finished to match framing system at exposed
fasteners.
17. Anchors: Accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish
compatible with adjoining materials as recommended by manufacturer.
18. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard non-staining corrosion-resistant flashing
compatible with adjacent materials.
B. Fire Rated Glazing:
1. Pyrostop, by Technical Glass Products (TGP).
a. Light transmitting glass laminated with intumescent interlayer.
b. Comply with ASTM C1036 and ASTM C1048; and Section 08 81 23 applicable
general requirements.
c. Glass Type GL-EX-F1 - 60 Minute Pilkington Pyrostop (W-60-361): Total unit 1-5/8
IN thick, nominal.
1) One hour fire rated; permanent UL label on each outer lite.
2) Outer Lite: 1-1/16 IN thick; composed of multiple sheets of “Optiwhite” glass
laminated with intumescent interlayer; color to match Glass Type GL-EX2; with
low-emissivity coating on No. 2 surface.
3) Spacer: Air Argon gas.
4) Inner Lite: 1/4 IN, clear tempered glass; permanent ‘safety glazing’ label on each
lite.
5) Performance Requirements: Daylight transmission approximately 77%; STC 44
dB.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
STEEL CURTAIN WALL
08 44 20 - 5
d. Glass Type GL-EX-F2 - 60 Minute Pilkington Pyrostop (W-60-361): Total unit 1-
5/8 IN thick, nominal Spandrel insulated glass.
1) One hour fire rated; permanent UL label on each outer lite.
2) Outer Lite: 1-1/16 IN thick; composed of multiple sheets of “Optiwhite” glass
laminated with intumescent interlayer; color to match Glass Type GL-EX1;
with low-emissivity coating on No. 2 surface.
3) Spacer: Air.
4) Inner Lite: 1/4 IN, clear tempered glass; permanent ‘safety glazing’ label on
each lite.
5) Performance Requirements: Daylight transmission approximately 77%; STC
44 dB.
e. Glass Type GL-EX-F3 - 60 Minute Pilkington Pyrostop (W-60-361): Total unit 1-
5/8 IN thick, nominal.
1) One hour fire rated; permanent UL label on each outer lite.
2) Outer Lite: 1-1/16 IN thick; composed of multiple sheets of Bronze tinted
glass laminated with intumescent interlayer; color to match Glass Type GL-
EX1; with low-emissivity coating on No. 2 surface.
3) Spacer: Air.
4) Inner Lite: 1/4 IN, clear tempered glass; permanent ‘safety glazing’ label on
each lite.
5) Performance Requirements: Daylight transmission approximately 25%.
f. Glass Type GL-EX-F4 - 60 Minute Pilkington Pyrostop (W-60-361): Total unit 1-
5/8 IN thick, nominal Spandral insulated glass.
1) One hour fire rated; permanent UL label on each outer lite.
2) Outer Lite: 1-1/16 IN thick; composed of multiple sheets of Bronze tinted
glass laminated with intumescent interlayer; color to match Glass Type GL-
EX1; with low-emissivity coating on No. 2 surface.
3) Spacer: Air.
4) Inner Lite: 1/4 IN, clear tempered glass; permanent ‘safety glazing’ label on
each lite.
5) Performance Requirements: Daylight transmission approximately 25%.

2. Glass shall be outside glazed and held in place with stainless steel pressure plates anchored
to the mullion using stainless steel fasteners.
3. Label glazing with permanent mark indicating manufacturer, name of product, testing
laboratory, fire rating period, safety glazing standards, and date of manufacture.
C. Accessories:
1. Exposed Fasteners: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Glazing Gaskets:
a. Exterior: ASTM C864; silicone compatible, extruded EPDM rubber.
b. Interior: Manufacturer approved, closed cell PVC tape, or silicone sealant.
3. Back Pans:
a. Manufacturer’s standard 0.036 IN (20 GA), galvanized units.
b. Depth: 4 IN.
c. Profile: Appropriate to application.
d. Reinforcing: Integral stiffeners for units exceeding 25 SQFT.
e. Insulation: 2 IN mineral wool, minimum.
f. Provide at spandrel glass panels.
g. Finish:
1) Paint exposed pans.
2) Color: Match Steel Curtain Wall.
4. Intumescent Tape: As supplied by frame manufacturer.
5. Setting Blocks: Calcium silicate.
6. Perimeter Anchors: Steel or 316 Stainless steel when exposed.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
STEEL CURTAIN WALL
08 44 20 - 6
7. Flashings: As recommended by manufacturer; same material and finish as cover caps.
8. Silicone Sealant: Dow Corning 790 by Dow Corning Corp.
9. Intumescent Caulk:
a. 3M Fire Barrier CP 25WB+.
b. Flame spread: 0.
c. Smoke developed: 0.
10. Slag Wool Fiber/Rock Wool Fiber Insulation:
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Fibrex.
2) Roxul.
3) Thermafiber.
b. ASTM C612 unfaced, rock wool fiber.
c. Flame spread: 15.
d. Smoke developed: 0.
e. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.
f. Nominal density: 4 LB/FT3, Types IA and IB.
g. Thermal resistance: 4 DEG F x h x SF/BTU x IN at 75 DEG F.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components per manufacturer's instructions.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners.
C. Make joints flush and weatherproof.
D. Prepare components to receive anchor devices.
E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to be concealed from view.
2.5 FINISHES
A. General:
1. Comply with NAAMM, Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products, for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2. Noticeable variation in appearance within individual pieces and abutting or adjacent pieces
is unacceptable.
B. Interior Steel Finishes:
1. Color-Coated Finish: Powder coating finish system applied to frames prior to shipping.
a. Color and Gloss:
1) As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match typical Exterior
Curtain Wall color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for installation of Steel Curtain Wall.
B. Verify openings are sized to receive curtain wall system and sill plate is level in accordance with
manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.
C. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Install systems plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
STEEL CURTAIN WALL
08 44 20 - 7
C. Back Pans:
1. Install in spandrel glazing pocket inboard of glass unit and seal to frame.
D. Install glazing in accordance with fire resistant glazing material manufacturer's
recommendations.
1. Field cutting is not allowed.
E. Pack perimeter of framing system to rough opening with mineral wool fire stop insulation or
rated intumescent sealant.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Test when representative portion of Steel Curtain Wall has been installed, glazed, perimeter
caulked and cured.
2. Where test results do not meet requirements, implement improved installation procedures,
correct deficiencies and retest.
B. Hose Test:
1. Test for water penetration in accordance with AAMA Standard 501.2, Specifications for
Field Check of Metal Curtain walls for Water Leakage.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect from damage of harmful contaminants.
B. Repair or replace damaged materials.
C. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose off site.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
STEEL CURTAIN WALL
08 44 20 - 8
SECTION 08 81 23
EXTERIOR GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Exterior Glass and Glazing in
accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glass Standards:
1. Flat glass:
a. ASTM C1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
b. Float glass: Type I, Quality q3; and Class 1 unless otherwise indicated.
c. Figured glass: Type II, Quality q7, Form 3; and Class 1, Finish f1 and Pattern p2 unless
otherwise indicated.
d. Provide Class 2 or 3 for tinted or integrally colored glass.
2. Flat glass, heat treated (coated/uncoated):
a. Tempered safety glass: Conform to ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201.
b. ASTM C1048 Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat
Glass.
c. ASTM C1651 Standard Test Method for Measurement of Roll Wave Optical Distortion
in Heat-Treated Flat Glass.
d. Heat strengthened glass: Kind HS, Type I, Quality q3, Class 1 and Condition A unless
otherwise indicated.
e. Tempered glass: Kind FT, Type I, Quality q3, Class 1 and Condition A unless
otherwise indicated.
f. Heat strengthened – tempered glass: Kind HS-FT, Type 1, Quality q3 and Condition A
unless otherwise indicated.
g. Provide Class 2 or 3 for tinted or integrally colored glass.
h. Provide Condition B or C for coated glass.
i. Distortion Tolerances:
1) Heat treated flat glass by horizontal, roller hearth process with inherent roller wave
distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed.
2) Maximum peak to valley roller wave 0.003 IN in central area and 0.008 IN within
10-1/2 IN of leading and trailing edge
3) Roll Wave (horizontal) distortion to maximum 0.003 IN at center of panel and
0.003 IN at edges of panels as measured from peak to valley.
4) Clear or low-iron glass 1/4 IN to 3/8 IN thick without ceramic frit or ink:
a) Maximum plus or minus 100mD millidiopters over 95 PCT of glass surface.
5) Maximum bow and warp 1/32 IN per lineal foot.
j. Fully tempered glass:
1) Provide heat soak testing in compliance with EN14179 including 2 HR dwell at
280 DEGC – 300 DEGC.
3. Insulating Glass Units:
a. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC), Class CBA.
b. ASTM E2190 Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and
Evaluation.
c. ASTM E2188 Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit Performance.
d. ASTM E2189 Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in Insulating
Glass Units.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
EXTERIOR GLASS AND GLAZING
08 81 23 - 1
4. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows.
5. ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings.
6. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Federal Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Material.
7. GANA Glazing Manual.
B. Glazing Standards:
1. GANA Glazing Manual.
2. Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units, by the Insulating Glass Manufacturers
Alliance (IGMA).
C. LEED Requirements:
1. Refer to Section 01 81 14, LEED v4 Requirements, for additional performance requirements
that may apply to products specified in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. 12 IN x 12 IN piece of each specified type of glass.
B. Contract Closeout Information:
1. Warranty.
C. Mock Up:
1. Provide glass, frames and related items as shown on mock-up drawing.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Written five (5) year warranty signed by installer to cover weather tightness of installation
including air and water integrity.
B. Written warranty signed by manufacturer or fabricator of glass units against failure.
1. Include costs associated with glass replacement and installation.
2. Failure: Deterioration due to normal conditions, thermal failure of insulating units, or
obscured vision.
a. Coated glass: 10 years.
b. Laminated glass: 5 years.
c. Insulating glass (vertical): 10 years.
d. Insulating glass (sloped): 5 years.
e. Reflective spandrel: 5 years.
f. Pyrolytic-coated, self-cleaning glass: 10 years.
g. Tempered glass: Heat soaked warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Insulating Glass and Insulating Spandrel Glass Fabricators:
1. Base:
a. Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG)
2. Optional:
a. Viracon.
b. AGC.
c. JE Berkowitz.
d. Oldcastle.
e. Technoglass.
f. Trulite.
B. Fire-Rated Glass Ceramic:
1. Base:
a. Technical Glass Products (TGP).
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
EXTERIOR GLASS AND GLAZING
08 81 23 - 2
2. Optional:
a. Safti.
b. Vetrotech.
C. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Glass:
1. Comply with indicated standards.
2. See Glass Types Schedule for listing of types.
3. Materials specified in Glass Types Schedule are minimum acceptable products.
4. Provide individual glass types used in fabrication of insulating units from single
manufacturer.
5. Manufacturer or fabricator determine if materials should be heat strengthened or fully
tempered at non-hazardous locations that do not require safety glazing and provide
accordingly.
6. Low-E coating:
a. Softcoat.
B. Glazing Compounds:
1. Non-sag and non-staining.
2. Pigmented to match frame units not requiring painting.
3. Compatible with adjacent surfaces.
4. For use in setting glass: Neutral-cure Silicone sealant.
5. Sealant tape: Butyl rubber sealant tape or ribbon having a continuous neoprene shim.
6. Gaskets:
a. Polyvinyl chloride or neoprene.
b. Extruded, flexible, of profile and hardness required to receive glass and provide a
watertight installation.
C. Installation Setting Blocks and Spacers:
1. Neoprene, compatible with sealants used.
2. Setting blocks: 80-90 durometer.
3. Spacers: 40-50 durometer.
4. Compressible filler: Closed cell jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam.
D. Insulating Glass Spacers:
1. Aluminum, desiccant filled.
E. Shims, clips, springs, angles, beads, attachment screws and other miscellaneous items: As
indicated or required.
2.3 EXTERIOR GLASS TYPES SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type GL-EX-F1: Fire rated 60 minutes (1 hour) insulated units specified in Sections 08
44 13 and 08 44 20.
B. Glass Type GL-EX-F2: Fire rated 60 minutes (1 hour) spandrel insulated units specified
in Section 08 44 20.
C. Glass Type GL-EX-F3: Fire rated 60 minutes (1 hour) insulated units specified in Section
08 44 20.
D. Glass Type GL-EX-F4: Fire rated 60 minutes (1 hour) spandrel insulated units specified
in Section 08 44 20.
E. Glass Type GL-EX1: Bronze tinted Insulated glazing unit.
1. Insulating glass; two sheets of 1/4 IN (6 MM) thick glass, hermetically sealed together at
edges with spacers and sealant, with 1/2 IN (12 MM)dehydrated air space.
2. Outside glass: Solarban R100 (Bronze) #2 on a Solar Bronze glass.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
EXTERIOR GLASS AND GLAZING
08 81 23 - 3
3. Inside glass: Clear glass.
4. Air space: Argon gas.
5. Visible light transmission: 25%.
6. Outdoor reflectance: 15%.
7. Winter U-Value: 0.29.
8. Shading coefficient: 0.21.
9. SHGC value: 0.18.
F. Glass Type GL-EX2: Clear Insulated glazing unit.
1. Insulating glass; two sheets of 1/4 IN (6 MM) thick glass, hermetically sealed together at
edges with spacers and sealant, with 1/2 IN (12 MM)dehydrated air space.
2. Outside glass: Solarban R60 on clear glass.
3. Inside glass: Clear glass.
4. Air space: Argon gas.
5. Outdoor reflectance: 11%.
6. Indoor reflectance: 12%.
7. SHGC value: 0.39.
G. Glass Type GL-EX3: Bronze tinted Spandrel insulated glass unit.
1. Insulating spandrel Glass; two sheets of 1/4 IN (6 MM) thick glass, hermetically sealed
together at edges with spacers and sealant, with 1/2 IN (12 MM)dehydrated air space.
2. Outside glass: Solarban R100 (Bronze) #2 on a Solar Bronze glass.
3. Inside glass: Clear glass.
4. Air space: Argon gas.
H. Glass Type GL-EX4: Clear Spandrel insulated glazing unit.
1. Insulating spandrel Glass; two sheets of 1/4 IN (6 MM) thick glass, hermetically sealed
together at edges with spacers and sealant, with 1/2 IN (12 MM)dehydrated air space.
2. Outside glass: Solarban R60 on clear glass.
3. Inside glass: Clear glass.
4. Air space: Argon gas.
I. Glass Type GL-EX5: Bronze tinted Tempered Insulated glazing unit. (At Skylight)
1. Insulating glass; two sheets of 1/4 IN (6 MM) thick tempered glass, hermetically sealed
together at edges with spacers and sealant, with 1/2 IN (12 MM)dehydrated air space.
2. Outside glass: Solarban R100 (Bronze) #2 on a Solar Bronze glass.
3. Inside glass: Clear glass.
4. Air space: Argon gas.
5. Markings: 1/8IN dots @ 1/4IN on center.
J. Glass Type GL-EX6: Bronze tinted Tempered Spandrel insulated glass unit. (At Skylight)
1. Insulating spandrel Glass; two sheets of 1/4 IN (6 MM) thick glass, hermetically sealed
together at edges with spacers and sealant, with 1/2 IN (12 MM)dehydrated air space.
2. Outside glass: Solarban R100 (Bronze) #2 on a Solar Bronze glass.
3. Inside glass: Clear glass.
4. Air space: Argon gas.
K. Glass Type GL-EX7:
1. Bronze tinted, tempered tongless float, 6 MM thick.
2. Bronze to match Solarban R100.
L. Glass Type GL-EX8:
1. Clear, tempered tongless float, 6 MM thick.
2. Clear to match Solarban R60.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
EXTERIOR GLASS AND GLAZING
08 81 23 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing, stop design, and conditions under which
glazing is to be installed.
B. Field verify glass size for each opening, within tolerances and dimensions established.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and IGMA Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass
Units.
C. Do not install glass with edge damage.
D. Install setting blocks in adhesive or sealant.
E. Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for glass size, except where gaskets
are used for glazing.
F. Minimum Bite:
1. 6mm monolithic units: 10 MM.
2. 25 MM insulating units: 12 MM.
3. For other sizes: Refer to Table C of AAMA’s Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Manual,
Volume 6, Glass & Glazing.
G. Sealant Depth: Equal to sealant width.
H. Miter cut and bond gasket ends together at corners.
I. Remove and replace damaged glass.
J. Ensure that weep system in frames is not blocked by sealant.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than seven (7) days prior to final completion of
work.
B. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations and GANA 01-0300.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
EXTERIOR GLASS AND GLAZING
08 81 23 - 5
SECTION 09 54 23
METAL CEILING (ACB)

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Acoustical Metal Ceiling (ACB)
Systems, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. LEED Requirements: Refer to Section 01 81 14, LEED v4 Requirements, for additional
performance requirements that may apply to products specified in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Reflected ceiling plan indicating metal ceiling layout, ceiling mounted items and
penetrations.
2. Suspension system, carrier and component layout.
3. System assembly details and connections of building components.
B. Product Data, Manufacturer’s:
1. Installation instructions.
2. Certification that product comply with specified requirements.
3. LEED submittal data.
C. Samples:
1. Physical finish samples for color selection.
2. Minimum 8 IN square metal panel unit.
3. 12 IN long samples of each beam, molding and trim.
4. 12 IN long sample of each suspension component.
D. Contract Closeout Information:
1. Maintenance data.
a. See Section 01 78 23.
E. Mock Up:
1. Provide 15 FT on-site Torsion Spring Metal Ceiling System (ACB 2/3) mock-up per
Architect’s sketch. Mock up to include diffuser, light fixture and sprinkler head. All
ceiling fixtures to be as specified.
2. Refer to Section 01 43 39.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Base designs: As indicated on Interior Finish Legend.
B. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. ACB-1 Linear Accessible Baffle System:
1. Tavola Prime Beam and Baffle ceiling system by Hunter Douglas.
2. 15/16 IN heavy duty black T-grid suspension system.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
LINEAR METAL CEILING (LMC)
09 54 23 - 1
3. Scissor clip beam attachment hanger bracket assembly.
4. Panel end clips finished to match beam.
5. Acoustic material: Non-woven black fabric polywrapped 1-1/2 IN thick glass fiber, 1-1/2
pcf density.
B. ACB-2/3 Torsion Spring Metal Ceiling Systems:
1. Ceiling systems by Gordon Ceilings.
2. Provide acoustical pad and Soundtex lining.
3. See Interior Finish legend for descriptions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrate for suitability to accept installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accord with approved shop drawings in cooperation with other trades affected.
B. Install so linear configuration shows no distortion.
C. Suspend hangers from structural supporting or intermediate members by looping and wire tying
directly to members.
1. Secure by wire tying to hanger inserts.
2. Where piping, ducts or other items interfere with proper hanger spacing, provide
supplemental supports.
D. Install acoustical blankets or filler strips in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. After completion, clean and leave in perfect condition.
B. Before acceptance of building by Owner, provide additional cleaning and replacement of
damaged or rejected portions of work.

END OF SECTION

Attachment A. ACB-2/3 Torsion Spring Metal Ceiling System Mock-Up, 1 page, follows and is part
of this Section.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
LINEAR METAL CEILING (LMC)
09 54 23 - 2
SECTION 09 54 23, ATTACHMENT A

ACB-2/3 TORSION SPRING METAL CEILING SYSTEM MOCK-UP

Refer to Sheet LVL-MN1-AR-A592 for additional details.

Addendum 6 June 5, 2018


SECTION 21 22 00
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Clean Agent Fire Protection System,
as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Systems Included:
1. FM-200 fire protection system.
a. Fire alarm and detection system.
b. Clean agent suppression systems.
c. Control and supervisory system.
d. FM-200 storage and distribution.
2. Preaction sprinkler releasing functions. The equipment of this section shall provide
detection and releasing system for pre-action sprinkler systems specified under Section 21
10 00.
C. Definition:
1. FM-200: Dupont, heptafluoropropane (HFC-27ea).
D. Provide FM-200 fire protection system in following rooms:
1. Refer to plans for areas of application.
2. For the room/s listed the following applies:
a. Fire Hazard: Class C (Energized Equipment)
b. Height above sea level: 200 FT.
c. The General Contractor shall seal the around the perimeter of all walls at the bottom of
the walls to the floor and at the top of the walls to the structure.
d. The height of the room from floor to the bottom of the deck of the floor above:
1) HRB Plate Store: 12 FT.
2) Auto Tube Store: 12 FT.
3) Automated Vial Store CM-ASR-1: 12 Ft.
4) Automated Vial Store CM-ASR-2: 12 Ft.
E. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide complete fire protection systems as described in the Contract Documents and according
to criteria of authority (ies) having jurisdiction (AHJ) and the Owner's insurance carrier.
1. Where system requirements as described in the Contract Documents exceed those of the
AHJ, meet requirements of both.
2. Where discrepancies exist among the AHJ, Owner's insurance carrier, and Contract
Documents, the most stringent requirements shall take precedence.
B. Authorities Having Jurisdiction:
1. Code Enforcement Agencies.
2. Fire Marshall's Office.
3. State Insurance Office.
4. Water Supply Authority.
C. Owners Insurance Carrier: CHUBB.
D. System Design and Installation Standards:
1. ANSI/NFPA-70, National Electrical Code.
2. ANSI/NFPA 2001, Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 1
3. Factory Mutual Engineering Commission (FM).
4. NEMA Publication, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
5. UL Publication, Fire Protection Equipment List with Quarterly Supplements.
6. UL 2166 - Standard for Halocarbon Clean Agent Extinguishing System Units
7. ANSI/ASME B16.3 – Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 300.
8. ANSI/ASME B16.9 – Factory Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.
9. ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping.
10. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 – Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
11. ANSI/AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code.
12. ANSI/NFPA 72A – Local Protective Signaling Systems.
13. ANSI/NFPA 72E – Automatic Fire Detectors.
14. ANSI/NFPA 75 – Electronic Computer Systems.
15. ASTM A53 – Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc coated, Welded and Seamless.
16. ASTM A106 – Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service.
17. ASTM A197 – Cupola Malleable Iron.
18. ASTM 394 – Ductile Iron.
19. ASTM A234 – Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
Elevated Temperatures.
20. Federal Communication Commission (FCC).
21. State and local codes.
E. Standards for FM-200 Storage Vessels:
1. Department of Transportation regulations on transportation of Hazardous Materials. Title
49, Code of Federal Regulations parts 100 to 199.
F. Hardware Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. IS0 9000 registered.
2. Name of the manufacturer shall appear on major components.
3. All devices, components and equipment shall be the products of one manufacturer.
4. All devices and equipment employed shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed and/or
Factory Mutual (FM) approved.
G. Installer Qualifications:
1. Experienced firm regularly engaged in installation and maintenance of automatic FM-200
clean agent fire extinguishing systems, with minimum of 5 years experience in design,
installation and testing of FM-200 fire suppression systems.
2. Authorized stocking distributor of manufacturer of equipment.
3. Fire Protection Installer shall be licensed in the State of New Jersey and Township of
Lawrenceville.
4. Installation of the following items/systems shall be done by authorized representatives of
respective manufacturers:
a. FM-200® fire suppression systems.
1) The installing contractor shall be trained by the suppression system hardware
supplier and manufacturer to design, install, test and maintain FM-200® fire
suppression systems.
2) Design of clean agent fire extinguishing system shall be performed by a currently
certified NICET Engineering Technician Level II or greater in Fire Protection
Engineering Technology and Special Hazards Systems Layout, who will be
responsible for the project.
5. Provide documentation that welders, and welding operators are certified in accordance with
American Welding Society Standard AWS D10.9.
1.3 CLEAN AGENT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. System shall provide an FM-200 agent minimum design concentration in all areas and/or
protected spaces, at the minimum anticipated temperature within the protected area as required
by the local code and as outlined in NFPA2001 and as follows:
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 2
1. The minimum design concentration for Class C is 1.35 times the minimum extinguishing
concentration from Class A.
2. FM-200 (HFC-227ea) minimum design concentration shall be as follows:
a. 6.25 PCT by volume for Class A hazards
b. 8.7 PCT by volume for Class B hazards
c. 6.25 PCT x 1.35 = 8.4 PCT by volume for Class C hazards
3. The protected area is a Class C hazard.
4. System design is to protect high value equipment that is not considered an occupied space.
Design shall include provisions for room evacuation prior to agent release.
5. The concentrations required can vary by equipment manufacturer. The design
concentration shall be in accordance with the concentration required for the specific
equipment manufacturer’s system.
B. System discharge time shall not exceed 10 seconds in accordance with the NFPA 2001 Standard
for Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems.
1.4 PREACTION SPRINKLER PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide heat detection and components for activation of a single interlocked pre-action sprinkler
system as shown on drawings.
B. Provide power supplies with 125 percent of the capacity required to operate all fire suppression
related devices and equipment simultaneously in an alarm condition.
C. Provide standby batteries with 125 percent of the capacity required to operate all devices and
equipment furnished under this Section in a normal supervisory mode for 90 hours, followed
immediately by 10 minutes of alarm operation.
D. The preaction sprinkler releasing circuit shall operate upon receipt of an alarm from a single heat
detector or sprinkler manual release station circuit.
E. Upon receipt of a supervisory signal from initiating device, sprinkler control valve switch,
pressure supervisory switch or key lockout switch, the suppression releasing system shall cause
an audible and visual display on fire suppression panel and operate a dry contact to signal a
supervisory condition to the building fire alarm system.
F. Upon receipt of a trouble signal due to a wiring fault or an internal system fault, the suppression
system releasing panel shall cause an audible and visual display on fire suppression panel and
operate a dry contact to signal a trouble condition to the building fire alarm system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Flow calculations: Per NFPA-2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems.
2. Installation layout drawings detailing the quantity, location, and marking of all system
components, including, but not limited to, agent storage tanks, nozzles, pipe runs including
pipe sizes and lengths, control panel(s), detectors, manual pull stations, abort stations,
audible and visual alarms.
3. A complete sequence of operation shall be submitted detailing all alarm devices, shutdown
functions, remote signaling, damper operation, time delay and agent discharge for each zone
or system.
4. Submit with local fire authority approval.
5. Test plan.
B. Project Information:
1. Certification of installer qualifications.
C. Contract Closeout Information:
1. Test Reports.
a. See Section 01 45 23.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 3
2. Owner Instruction Report.
a. See Section 01 78 36.
3. Operation and Maintenance Data.
a. See Section 01 78 23.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Arrange and pay for permits, fees and inspections required.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty against defective design, materials and workmanship for one (1) year
after Substantial Completion.
1. Provide 2 inspections of each system during guarantee period.
2. First inspection shall be 6 months after system acceptance and second at 12 months.
3. Inspections shall include determination of agent contents and pressure and that system is in
proper working order, a complete checkout of control, detection and alarm systems.
4. Submit documents, certifying satisfactory system conditions. Include manufacturer’s
certificate of acceptance of qualifications of Inspector.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals to Owner.
B. Include electrical schematic of circuits, written description of system design, drawings
illustrating control logic and equipment location, and technical bulletins describing equipment.
C. Provide list of recommended spare parts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. FM-200 fire protection system including cylinders, discharge valves, control panel, detectors,
nozzles, alarm devices, and accessories:
1. UL listed and FM approved for releasing service.
2. Documented by manufacturer as compatible with releasing devices provided under
Section 21 10 00 and Section 21 22 00.
3. Modular microprocessor based control unit with field programmable operation.
4. Internal power supply and standby batteries for operation as specified.
B. Manufacturers. Use one manufacturer for components.
1. Base:
a. Fike.
2. Optional:
a. Chemetron Fire Systems
b. Kidde Fire Systems.
c. Siemens Fire Safety
d. Tyco Suppression Systems.
e. Fenwal Protection Systems.
C. FM-200 fire suppression agent:
1. Base:
a. Dupont.
D. Other manufacturers, who have minimum of 10 years experience providing similar systems in
satisfactory operation, desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00.
1. Other manufacturers are responsible for changes required as a result of using their products.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 4
2.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design system to protect indicated areas as specified. System shall be a total flooding type fire
protection system that utilizes a clean agent fire extinguishing system. System is a fixed
installation where equipment is designed and installed to provide fire extinguishing capability of
hazards described.
B. Provide contract drawings indicating general arrangement of areas or rooms to receive fire
detection, alarm and FM-200 fire suppression systems.
C. Provide fire extinguishing system to protect equipment and personnel in indicated area.
D. Review drawings so items that will affect operation of FM-200 system (such as fire detection
equipment, air diffuser openings, door openings, fire and smoke dampers) are considered in
design of system.
E. The FM-200® suppression system shall include a detection and control system with provision for
both pre-alarm and automatic agent release.
F. Interface fire protection system with building fire alarm.
G. Performance requirements: Shall be determined from plan area and hazard level of area to be
protected.
2.3 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM OPERATION:
A. ALARM: Activation of any one smoke detector shall cause:
1. Audible alarm and visual display on fire suppression panel.
2. Activation of Horn/Strobe unit, (slow)
3. Annunciation to the building fire alarm system.
B. PRE-DISCHARGE: Activation of any two smoke detectors shall cause:
1. Audible alarm and visual display on fire suppression panel.
2. Activation of Horn/Strobe unit, (fast
3. Initiation of 30 second time delay.
4. Open damper to pressure relief valve.
C. RELEASE: 30 second time delay expiration shall cause:
1. Release condition displayed at the fire suppression panel.
2. Activation of horn/strobe units (steady) and discharge strobes.
3. Fire suppression agent to be discharged.
D. MANUAL RELEASE: Activation of a manual release station shall cause:
1. Release condition displayed at the fire suppression panel.
2. Activation of horn/strobe units (steady) and discharge strobes.
3. Fire suppression agent to be discharged.
4. All system function to initiate.
5. An override of the system abort switch.
E. ABORT SWITCH: Activation of a system abort switch shall cause:
1. An abort condition to be displayed at the fire suppression panel.
2. A trouble signal to be sent to the building fire alarm system.
3. A reset of any time delay within the system. Upon release the system will count down the
pre-set time delay and agent release will occur.
F. TROUBLE: A trouble condition shall cause:
1. A trouble condition to be displayed at the fire suppression panel.
2. A trouble signal to be sent to the building fire alarm system.
G. SUPERVISORY: A supervisory condition shall cause:
1. A supervisory condition to be displayed at the fire suppression panel.
2. Annunciation to the building fire alarm system.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 5
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Equipment and Devices:
1. Listed in UL Fire Protection Equipment List or Factory Mutual Approval Guide.
2. Provide standard products of latest design, suitable to perform functions intended.
3. Mark name of manufacturer and model number on major components.
4. Key locks alike.
5. Use same model of component for each item performing same function.
B. Equipment Instruction Plates:
1. Provide engraved instruction plates detailing emergency procedures at each system control
panel and at each hazard area manual discharge station/abort switch location.
2. Provide permanent nameplates in control panel to identify control logic units, contacts and
major circuits.
2.5 PIPING AND PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Following section is minimum standards for installation. If requirements of local codes or the
authority having jurisdiction is more stringent, these more stringent requirements shall govern
the installation. Distribution piping and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements, NFPA 2001, and approved piping standards and guidelines.
B. Pipe for FM-200 Systems:
1. Black or galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A-53 seamless or electric welded Grade A
or B; or ASTM A-106 Grade A, B, or C:
a. Threaded joints.
b. Welded joints.
C. Fittings:
1. Threaded fittings for FM-200:
a. Minimum 620 PSI working pressure.
b. Cast iron and Class 150 PSI fittings shall NOT be used.
D. Welding:
1. All welding shall be performed by an experienced welder.
2. All welded pipe 3/4 IN and smaller shall be welded using gas welding or other approved
method. Unshielded electric arc welding may be used on pipe sizes larger than 3/4 IN.
3. All welds shall be pounded to loosen scale and weld beads and then cleaned of foreign
matter.
E. Pipe Reductions:
1. Welded pipe reductions shall be one of following devices.
a. Butt weld concentric reducers.
b. Swaged nipples.
c. Weld-o-lets ™.
d. Where socket weld fittings are permitted (see item 5), a socket weld reducing coupling
can be used only for a one size reduction. All other reductions in socket weld pipe shall
be made using the above permitted methods.
e. When methods (b), (c), or (d) are used, it is imperative that these fittings be installed in
strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. In each case, they
must be installed so as to permit full flow. All entrance holes from the main pipe run to
the fitting must be of proper size and free of sharp edges, ridges or burrs.
2. Reductions in screwed pipe shall be by means of screwed concentric reducing fittings or
swaged nipples.
2.6 PILOT NETWORK
A. Pilot piping shall be either (a) 1/4 IN threaded pipe or (b) 1/4 IN steel or stainless steel tubing.
1. Method (a):

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 6
a. Pipe shall be minimum of schedule 40 and where it is installed outdoors or in a
corrosive environment, galvanized pipe shall be used.
b. Threaded pilot pipe connections shall be treated with a suitable pipe sealant (ie: SWAK
by Cajun, Reactor Seal or equivalent). The use of Teflon tape on pilot piping is NOT
allowed.
c. Pipe fittings shall be 300 LB malleable or ductile iron. A 300 LB brass to steel union
shall be installed near the terminations of all pilot piping. 150 LB fittings are NOT
allowed.
2. Method (b):
a. Steel tubing shall be 1/4 IN and shall be painted to provide corrosion protection.
Tubing installed outdoors or in corrosive environments shall be stainless steel 1/4 IN.
Tubing must be reamed after cutting. Pipe tubing shall be of wall thickness required by
applicable standards and codes and shall meet manufacturer’s recommendation.
b. Tubing fittings shall be of the same material as the tubing and shall be of the
compression type. Tubing to pipe fitting shall be treated with a pipe sealant as
described Method (a) above.
c. Tubing shall be properly supported.
2.7 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Piping through building walls, partitions, floor slabs, roof slabs and the like shall be sleeved.
1. Schedule 40 pipe at least two sizes larger than the pipe being sleeved.
2. One inch pipe is the minimum size to be used as a sleeve.
B. Pack sleeves with an approved sealing material so as to be dust tight and to meet UL fire rating
requirements.
2.8 PAINTING
A. Coordinate painting with architectural finishes and requirements.
2.9 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the provisions outlined in ANSI B31.1, current
edition, except as modified and supplemented by this specification. All pipe must be solidly
anchored to structural members where longitudinal or lateral movement is possible.
1. Rigid hangers are required wherever a change in direction or change in elevation in the
piping system occurs. On long straight runs, at least every other hanger shall be rigid.
2. Fabricate hangers of steel and installed in a workmanlike manner.
3. Attach piping to rigid hangers by means of U-bolts locked with double nuts, one on each
side of the hanger. The pipe shall be free to move longitudinally within the U-bolt except
where the piping design requires it to be anchored.
4. Design hangers and pipe to prevent stresses from being induced into the piping during
temperature change caused by clean agent system discharge.
2.10 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM COMPONENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Cylinders:
1. Conform cylinder assemblies to regulations of Department of Transportation and of capacity
to meet system requirements. Cylinders shall be U.L. Listed, and FM Approved.
2. Fit cylinders with a resilient pressure seat type forged brass valve, and shall have a threaded
steel anti-recoil protective cap for handling and shipment. The storage containers shall be
equipped with safety rupture disks and each container shall have a pressure gauge to provide
visual supervision of the container pressure.
3. Normal operating temperature range: 32 DEGF to 130 DEGF.
4. Provide each cylinder with a UL Listed/FM Approved Agent Release Module. This module
shall store the power required to operate the actuator upon signal from the control panel.
5. Provide a cylinder weighing device, UL Listed/FM Approved liquid level indicator, or
alternative method to determine the amount of FM-200 agent remaining in cylinder.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 7
6. Provide a low pressure supervisory switch for each cylinder.
7. Provide cylinders with factory supplied mounting bracket for wall, ceiling, or floor
mounting. The cylinders and racks shall be arranged to allow a service aisle for cylinder
removal and cylinder weighing.
8. Locate each supply within hazard area, or as near as possible.
2.11 DISCHARGE VALVES
A. Fit each cylinder with a pressure operated discharge valve. Each valve shall include an integral
safety relief device, which serves to protect cylinder against excessive internal pressure.
B. Cylinder valve shall have a forged brass body with external connections for actuation devices.
Each valve shall be provided with a removable pressure gauge or solenoid valve with gauge for
pressure reading.
C. When more than one cylinder is connected to a common manifold, a check valve shall be
provided with each cylinder. Check valves that utilize “O” ring seats shall not be used as they
can be dislodged during discharge.
2.12 CONTROLS, DETECTION, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Control Panel:
1. Control system and its components shall be UL Listed and FM approved, and shall conform
to the specifications of the control panel manufacturer.
2. Control panel shall be programmable such that an adequate pre-discharge alarm period can
be set at the time of system test to ensure personnel safety.
3. Control system shall perform all functions necessary to operate the system detection,
actuation and auxiliary functions.
4. Microprocessor based.
5. Cross zone, sequential manual release, abort, water flow and supervisory detection types.
6. Minimum of three Class B, Style Y notification appliance circuits rated for 2 amps at
24VDC.
7. Dedicated release circuits compatible with agent release and solenoid actuation.
8. Five, Class B, Style B initiating circuits.
9. Alpha-numeric LED display for status and troubleshooting.
10. Programmable pre-discharge and discharge timers.
11. Flush, wall mounted, steel, red enclosure with removable door.
12. Input power: 120VAC
13. Integral 4 amp power supply.
14. Control system shall include battery standby power to support 24 HRS in standby and 5
minutes in alarm.
B. Detectors:
1. The detectors shall be spaced and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and the guidelines of NFPA 72.
a. The detection system shall employ single zone detection, as specified by the hardware
manufacturer and the appropriate authority having jurisdiction
2. Smoke Detectors:
a. Provide photoelectric smoke detectors.
1) Photoelectric smoke detector:
a) Detector head and base shall be UL Listed compatible with a UL Listed fire
alarm panel.
b) Voltage and RF Transient protected.
c) 2 or 4 wire base compatibility.
d) Low profile, 1.8 IN high including base.
e) Built-in magnetic detector test feature.
f) Two built-in power/sensitivity supervision/alarm LEDs for 360 degree
viewing.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 8
g) Non-directional smoke chamber.
h) Vandal resistant security locking feature.
i) Built-in magnetic detector test feature.
j) Operating Voltage: 15.0 – 33.0 VDC.
k) Ambient Temperature: 32 DEGF to 120 DEGF
l) Color: Bone PC
m) Case Material: ABS Blend.
C. Manual Release:
1. The manual release switch shall be a dual action device requiring two distinct operations to
initiate a system actuation as specified by the hardware manufacturer and the appropriate
authority having jurisdiction
a. Stainless steel housing
b. Keyed red plastic release button with spring clip safety pin and seal.
D. Abort Stations:
1. Provide abort stations as specified by the hardware manufacturer and the appropriate
authority having jurisdiction.
a. Stainless steel housing.
b. Push button activation.
2.13 NOZZLES
A. Discharge Nozzles:
1. Nozzles shall be of corrosion resistant construction and shall be designed specifically for
clean agent application.
2. Nozzles shall be permanently marked as to type and orifice.
3. UL listed and/or FM approved and shall be provided within the manufacturer's guidelines to
distribute the FM-200® agent throughout the protected spaces.
2.14 ALARM DEVICES
A. Electrically actuated fire alarm horns and strobe lights shall be furnished and installed. The
sound output for the horns shall be adequate for the conditions encountered. The strobe lens
shall be white with red letters (FIRE). Each fire alarm horn shall be actuated and receive
operation power from the control panel. Terminals for this purpose shall be provided in the
system control cabinet.
1. Alarm horn/strobe combination:
a. All alarm devices shall be UL listed and/or FM approved.
b. Alarm horn/strobe combination:
1) Shall have the ability to silence the audible signal while leaving the visible signal
energized.
2) Minimum flash rate of 1 Hz up to 2 Hz.
3) Field selectable strobe candela.
4) Switch for chime, whoop, mechanical, or 2400 Hz tone.
5) Switch selection for high or low dBA.
6) Tamperproof re-entrant grill.
7) Surface mounted enclosure.
8) Synchronize strobe and/or horn with control module.
9) Operating Voltage: 16-33 VDC.
10) Voltage: 24 VDC
11) Capable of testing supervision without disconnecting the wires.
2.15 ACCESSORIES
A. Relays:

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 9
1. Provide multi-voltage relays as required to install, test, and operate the system. Provide
SPDT or DPDT relays as required. Each relay position may be energized from one of four
input voltages. Each relay position shall contain a red light emitting diode which indicates
the relay coil is energized. Relays shall be provided with dustproof metal enclosures with
LED viewing port. Relays shall be UL listed.
B. Pressure switches:
1. Switches shall be heavy duty, double pole, single throw, one for each storage tank. Each
switch shall be provided with a manual operator for test and reset.
2.16 AGENT
A. Clean, dry, non-conductive, non-corrosive, non-damaging, non-deteriorating gas.
B. Meet requirements of UL Component Recognition meeting the requirements of NFPA.
C. UL Listed and FM Approved.
D. Suitable for use in normally occupied spaces.
E. Store in container super pressurized with nitrogen to a maximum working pressure of 360 PSIG.
F. Characteristics:
1. Ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero.
2. Atmospheric Lifetime less than 50 years.
3. LC50 > 800,000 parts per million (ppm).
4. Agent shall be listed as “acceptable” on the EPA’s SNAP list.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with standards indicated and manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
B. Performed in workmanlike manner according to the highest standard of modern practice.
C. Secure each agent storage container in place according to the manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
D. Threaded valves such as selector valves, check valves, and solenoid valves shall be installed
with a union immediately downstream. Valves having more than two connection points such as
shuttle valves and pilot valves shall be installed with a union adjacent to the valve in each
connection line. Pipe connections to equipment items such as discharge delay devices, pressure
switches, etc., shall have a union adjacent to the equipment.
E. Piping to pressure releases shall be as specified for discharge piping. All take-offs for pressure
release piping shall be from the top of the discharge piping.
F. Pipe and fittings shall be new and of recent manufacture.
1. Reductions in pipe size must be made by using reducing fittings, reducers or swaged
nipples.
a. Reducing bushings are not acceptable.
2. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation. Only noncombustible cleaner designed
for specific purpose shall be used. All foreign matter and oil shall be removed by cleaning
process. Pipe lengths must be reamed after cutting, blown clear, and swabbed with suitable
solvents to remove burrs, sharp edges, mill varnish and cutting oil before assembly.
3. Pipe and fittings installed and exposed to weather or in corrosive environments shall be
galvanized or treated with a proper protective coating.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 10
4. Screwed pipe shall be coated with Teflon tape or an appropriate pipe joint compound.
When tape or pipe joint compound is used, coating of the threads must start at least two
threads back from the pipe end. Care must be taken so as not to allow sealant to enter
valves or controls.
5. Piping supports shall be fabricated and installed so that they will not be disengaged by the
movement of the supported pipe.
6. Securely support piping by UL listed hangers with allowance for expansion and contraction.
Most installations lend themselves to the use of support systems such as Unistrut.
7. Pipe shall not be hung using one pipeline as a support for another.
8. Piping supports shall be arranged so that no excessive bending stresses are induced into the
piping from concentrated loads between supports.
9. Maximum spacing between supports shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations and
shall prevent damage to the pipe from weight and movement of the piping system.
G. Sleeves through floor slabs must extend at least 2 IN above the floor. A greater extension may
be used if required by local building codes.
H. Sleeves extending through roof slabs must extend above the roof and be flashed in accordance
with local building codes.
I. System shall be released automatically by optical/ionization type smoke detectors located in the
hazard in accordance with detector ratings, good practice and applicable detection system
standards. Operation of detector will signal the control panel for automatic release and/or alarm
as specified under the detector portion of this specification. An electric signal shall actuate a
normally de-energized, normally closed solenoid valve on the pilot head. Before this operation,
the control panel shall alarm to evacuate the hazard area.
J. Manual release:
1. Manual release station shall be located at each exit from the protected hazard.
K. Abort stations:
1. An abort switch shall be provided at each exit point.
2. Operation of the abort station shall send a "system aborted" indication to the control panel
when a fire condition exists. A separate "trouble" indication shall result if the abort station
is operated when no alarm condition exists.
L. Distribution System:
1. The piping shall be laid out to give maximum flow and to avoid possible mechanical,
chemical or other damage. Installation shall follow submitted drawings as closely as
possible. System designer must be consulted for anything other than minor deviations to
pipe routing.
M. Nozzles shall be supplied in quantities sufficient to properly cover the area(s) being protected in
accordance with NFPA.
N. Alarms shall be adequate to alert plant personnel located in the protected areas in accordance
with NFPA.
1. A motor bell shall be provide outside each entrance to the protected area in accordance with
NFPA.
2. A horn/strobe shall be provided outside each entrance to the protected area in accordance
with NFPA.
O. Caution and advisory signs
1. Caution and advisory signs are required at each entrance to a protected space, and at each
manual discharge station.
2. A flashing light sign is required over each exit from a protected space.
P. The system shall include the required number of contacts which shall send signal to control
panel for relay to miscellaneous equipment. The control panel will be wired to shut down
computer equipment and air handling units upon clean agent discharge.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 11
3.2 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon completion of installation, the system shall be thoroughly tested for correct operation and
function. Tests shall include functional operation of all mechanical and electrical equipment and
careful inspection of all piping and nozzles. Submit a test plan describing how system will be
tested.
1. Include a step-by-step description of tests.
2. Indicate type and location of test apparatus to be employed.
3. Tests shall demonstrate that operating and installation requirements have been met.
4. Tests shall demonstrate that entire control system functions as intended.
5. Containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and installation.
6. Electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity and resistance to earth.
7. Test circuits: Automatic discharge, manual discharge, equipment shutdown, alarm devices
and storage container pressure.
8. Test supervision of each circuit. A discharge tests shall be conducted for each area; each
area shall be tested separately.
9. Room integrity tests shall be conducted in accordance with NFPA 2001.
10. An inspection shall be made to ensure that all required dampers, door bottom seals, weather-
stripping, caulking and foam sealant have been installed and that the areas protected shall
contain the gas.
11. Piping shall be pneumatically tested in a closed circuit for a period of 10 minutes at 50
PSIG; at the end of 10 minutes, the pressure drop shall not exceed 20 PCT of the test
pressure.
12. A flow test employing nitrogen shall be performed on the piping network to verify that flow
is continuous and the piping and nozzles unobstructed.
B. Conduct tests in presence of Owner after test plan is approved.
1. Tests shall be conducted by Contractor, equipment manufacturer, and manufacturer's
representative.
C. Contractor shall provide a test report, including a copy of the recording. After testing, the
system shall be in full operating condition.
D. Final Inspection:
1. At final inspection a factory trained representative of manufacturer of major equipment shall
demonstrate that system is functioning properly.
3.3 OWNER PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION
A. Provide instruction as required to building personnel. “Hands-on” demonstrations of operation
of system components and entire system shall be provided.
1. Each training session shall include emergency procedures, abort functions, system control
panel operation, trouble procedures and safety requirements.
2. Each session shall include complete demonstration of system.
B. Provide reports of each training session.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. Contractors shall make available an inspection service contract to ensure that services are always
available to keep fire protection system in full operation.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
21 22 00 - 12
SECTION 22 10 05
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Water system to domestic, laboratory and tempered water distribution systems.


B. Domestic water system to plumbing fixtures, specialties and equipment; and mechanical
equipment.
C. Laboratory water system to sinks, cupsinks, and equipment.
D. Tempered water system to safety showers and eyewashes.
E. Sanitary waste/vent system from plumbing fixtures, equipment, and general use floor drains.
F. Laboratory waste/vent system from laboratory sinks, cupsinks, laboratory floor drains and
laboratory equipment.
G. Storm water system from roof drains.
H. Laboratory compressed air system to laboratory equipment and outlets.
I. High pressure compressed air system to mechanical equipment and laboratory equipment.
J. Laboratory vacuum system to laboratory equipment and outlets.
K. Laboratory nitrogen gas system to laboratory equipment and outlets.
L. High pressure nitrogen gas system to laboratory equipment.
M. Liquid nitrogen system to laboratory equipment and outlets.
N. Carbon dioxide gas system to laboratory equipment and outlets.
O. Argon gas system to laboratory equipment and outlets.
P. Laboratory Chilled Water from local in lab chiller to fume hood outlets.
Q. Piping and final connections to fume hood cold water faucets and gas outlets.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Install liquid faucets and gas outlets on laboratory casework. Casework is specified under
Section 12 35 53.
B. Install liquid faucets and gas outlets on fume hoods and biological safety cabinets. Fume hoods
and biological safety cabinets are specified under Section 11 53 13 and Section 11 53 53.
C. Install wall mounted gas outlets specified under Section 12 35 53.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 31 11 - Suspended Loading - Coordination and Limitations, for coordination and


limitations of suspended loading.
B. Section 03 31 00 - Concrete.
C. Section 07 92 16 - Interior Joint Sealants.
D. Section 11 53 13 - Fume Hoods, for furnishing and installation of cupsinks, drains with
tailpieces, cold and hot water faucets and gas outlets at fume hoods.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS
22 10 05 - 1
E. Section 11 53 53 - Biological Safety Cabinets, for furnishing and installation of gas outlets at
biological safety cabinets.
F. Section 12 35 53 - Laboratory Casework and Furnishings, for furnishing and installation of
sinks, cupsinks, eyewash units and drains with tailpieces at casework.
G. Section 22 05 75 - Drains and Cleanouts.
H. Section 22 10 06 - Building Services Process Piping Schedules, for piping schedules, testing and
cleaning.
I. Section 22 10 19 - Piping Specialties.
J. Section 22 33 00 - Water Heaters.
K. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.
L. Section 22 63 16 - Laboratory Gas Equipment.
M. Section 22 67 00 - Purified Water Generating Equipment.
N. Section 22 67 05 - Purified Water Piping Systems.
O. Section 25 10 00 - Building Management System, for HVAC instrumentation and controls.
P. Section 26 05 15 - Distribution Equipment, for magnetic motor starters.
Q. Section 26 27 30 - Wiring Connections.
R. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting for Utilities, for excavation and
backfilling for utility trenches.
S. Section 33 31 00 - Sanitary Sewerage Piping.
T. Section 33 40 00 - Storm Drainage Systems, for site storm drainage system.
U. Section 33 46 00 – Foundation and Underslab Drainage System, for perimeter foundation and
underslab subdrainage systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Follow Section 01 33 00. Make all submittals at one time. Partial submittals will not be
reviewed.
B. Shop Drawings: Show dimensioned and detailed piping layouts of underslab systems and
systems within basement, mechanical rooms, and shafts.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: COMPLY WITH:

A. ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


B. ASHRAE Standards 90.1 - 2016.
C. Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating Pumps.
D. National Sanitation Foundation.
E. UL 778 - Standard for Motor Operated Water Pumps.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: COMPLY WITH:

A. 2015 International Building Code as adopted by the State of New Jersey.


B. 2015 National Standard Plumbing Code as adopted by the State of New Jersey.
C. 2015 International Mechanical Code as adopted by the State of New Jersey.
D. State of New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS
22 10 05 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
For description of Piping Systems, see Schedules in Section 22 10 06.
2.1 INCOMING WATER SERVICE, DOMESTIC USE, LABORATORY USE, TEMPERED
WATER SYSTEMS

A. Below Grade:
1. 2 Inch and Smaller: Schedule P-5.3.
2. 3 Inch and Larger: Schedule P-2.1.
B. Above Grade:
1. 4 Inch and Smaller: Schedule P-5.1.
2. 6 Inch and Larger: Schedule P-3.5.
3. 2 Inch and Smaller: Schedule P-5.1.
4. 3 Inch and Larger: Schedule P-5.12.
5. Testing/Cleaning/Sterilizing: Schedule P-8.1 and P-8.2.
2.2 PURIFIED WATER

A. See Section 22 67 05.


2.3 SANITARY WASTE SYSTEM

A. Gravity Piping, Below Grade: Schedule P-1.1.


B. Gravity Piping, Above Grade:
1. Waste and Vent: Schedule P-1.2 and P-3.4.
2. Indirect Waste:
a. 2 Inch and Smaller: Schedule P-5.2.
b. 3 Inch and Larger: Schedule P-1.2.
C. Pump Discharge, Above Grade:
1. 2 Inch and Smaller: Schedule P-3.10.
2. 3 Inch and Larger: Schedule P-2.4.
2.4 LABORATORY WASTE SYSTEMS

A. Gravity Piping, Below Grade:


1. Single wall: Schedule P-6.5.
B. Gravity Piping, Above Grade:
1. Waste and Vent:
a. Single wall: Schedule P-6.1.
b. Double wall: Schedule P-6.8.
2. Indirect Waste: Schedule P-6.1.
2.5 STORM WATER, RECLAIMED GROUNDWATER AND CLEAN CONDENSATE
SYSTEMS

A. Gravity Piping, Below Grade: Schedule P-1.1.


B. Gravity Piping, Above Grade: Schedule P-1.2 and P-3.4.
C. Pump Discharge, Above Grade:
1. 2 Inch and Smaller: Schedule P-3.10.
2. 3 Inch and Larger: Schedule P-3.3.
2.6 LABORATORY AND HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS

A. 4 Inch and Smaller: Schedule P-5.8.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS
22 10 05 - 3
2.7 LABORATORY AND HIGH PRESSURE NITROGEN GAS SYSTEMS

A. Schedule P-5.8.
2.8 LABORATORY VACUUM SYSTEM AND EXHAUST PIPING (FOR MODULE N)

A. Schedule P-5.4.
2.9 LABORATORY VACUUM SYSTEM AND EXHAUST PIPING (FOR MODULE M)

A. 6 Inch and Larger: Schedule P-3.7.


B. 4 Inch and Smaller: Schedule P-5.7.
2.10 LIQUID NITROGEN SYSTEM

A. Refer to Section 22 63 17.


2.11 CARBON DIOXIDE GAS SYSTEM

A. Schedule P-4.2.
2.12 ARGON GAS SYSTEMS

A. Schedule P-4.2.
2.13 LABORATORY CHILLED WATER

A. Schedule P-6.3.
2.14 HYDROGEN GAS SYSTEMS

A. Schedule P-4.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install systems in accordance with approved submittals and referenced standards, and Section 01
45 00 regarding Quality Control of installation.
B. Use chrome plated material for exposed non-insulated piping in finished spaces.
C. Follow Section 01 31 00 for scheduling "shutdowns".
D. Follow Section 22 01 09 for plumbing alteration work.
E. Install branch shut-off valves to allow construction to proceed with a minimum amount of drain-
down time for existing system(s).
F. Install piping within fume hoods and below countertop. Install full size piping up to outlets.
Reduce only as required, and as close as possible to outlets and valves.
G. Identify piping in accordance with Section 22 05 53.
H. Insulate piping in accordance with Section 22 07 00.
3.2 INCOMING WATER SERVICE, DOMESTIC USE, LABORATORY USE AND TEMPERED
WATER SYSTEMS

A. Water meters are for owner use for LEED reporting and will be furnished by the contractor.
B. Install water meter assembly complete with strainer and other accessories.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS
22 10 05 - 4
C. Protect domestic and laboratory water distribution systems against backflow and siphonage, both
natural and induced.
D. Install backflow preventers as specified in Section 22 10 19 to isolate equipment connected to
domestic and/or laboratory water systems.
E. Balance hot water recirculating systems to deliver required flow and temperature to faucets,
fixtures and equipment.
F. Provide retainer glands when flanged ductile iron pipe is installed at point of building entry for
incoming water service.
3.3 STORM WATER, SANITARY AND LABORATORY WASTE SYSTEMS

A. Prior to installation of underground piping, remove large stones or other hard matter which could
damage pipe or prevent consistent backfilling or compaction. Place pipe on compacted subgrade
or 6 inch bed of sand.
B. Lay pipe to maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:1000).
C. Install vertical lines plumb.
D. Install horizontal lines 4 inches and larger with a minimum uniform pitch of 1/8 inch per foot
(1:100) unless shown otherwise. Install piping 3 inches and smaller with a minimum uniform
pitch of 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) unless shown otherwise. Make changes in pipe sizes with
reducers or increasers.
E. Connect horizontal lines with vertical stacks using 45 degree "Y" branches, 60 degree "Y"
branches, combination "Y" and 1/8 bend branches, and sanitary tees or other acceptable fittings
of equivalent sweep. Short sweeps may be used in soil and waste lines where flow direction
changes from horizontal to vertical.
F. Connect horizontal lines with other horizontal lines using 45 degree "Y" branches, combination
"Y" and 1/8 bend branches, or other fittings of equivalent sweep.
G. Connect vertical lines with horizontal lines using 45 degree "Y" branches, combination "Y" and
1/8 bend branches, or other fittings of equivalent sweep.
H. Extend vent pipes through roof. Vents through roof must be a minimum of 3 inch pipe size with
the change of size at least 12 inches below the underside of the roof. Do not locate vents within
10 feet of windows or air intakes. Base flashing is specified under roofing specifications.
Counterflashing is specified under Section 22 05 05.
I. Underground Soil Piping: 3 inch I D minimum.
J. Underground Waste Piping: 2 inch I D minimum.
K. Provide cleanouts at beginning of each run, at each change of direction and at intervals in piping
so that maximum spacing between cleanouts is 75 feet for pipe of 4 inch diameter and smaller,
and 100 feet for piping over 4 inch diameter.
L. Mechanical couplings (grooved type) and fittings may be used in lieu of no-hub joints for
interior rain water conductors when not located above hard ceilings, in sealed shafts or in other
inaccessible areas.
M. Install double wall laboratory waste piping in ceiling of Module M Basement Electrical and
UPS rooms. Follow pipe manufacturer’s instruction for fabrication of joints and support of
piping. Route drain from outer casing pipe to floor drain in mechanical room. Allow for
visual inspection of termination of drain pipe to assure no leakage.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS
22 10 05 - 5
3.4 LABORATORY AND HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSED AIR, LABORATORY VACUUM,
CARBON DIOXIDE, LABORATORY AND HIGH PRESSURE NITROGEN GAS SYSTEMS

A. After installation of each section of piping, and prior to installation of service outlet valves, blow
system clear of moisture and foreign matter.
B. For oxygen cleaned systems, furnish all piping, tubing, fittings, valves and accessories which
contact the gas pre-cleaned for oxygen service from the manufacturer. For items which cannot
be furnished pre-cleaned or have become contaminated, before installation, thoroughly wash
using a hot solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate, one pound chemical to 3
gallons of water. After washing, rinse with water, dry and cap until installation.
C. For solder joint systems, avoid leaving excess flux inside pipe and fittings. Do not use flux on
brazed joint systems. For brazed joint systems, during brazing of tubing connections, purge
interior continuously with nitrogen.
D. Install strainers on inlet side of pressure reducing valves.
3.5 ARGON AND HYDROGEN GAS SYSTEMS

A. Furnish all piping, tubing, fittings, valves and accessories which contact the gas pre-cleaned for
oxygen service from the manufacturer. For items which cannot be furnished pre-cleaned or have
become contaminated, before installation, thoroughly wash using a hot solution of sodium
carbonate or trisodium phosphate, one pound chemical to 3 gallons of water. After washing,
rinse with water, dry and cap until installation.
B. Do not use flux on brazed joint systems. During brazing of tubing connections, continuously
purge interior with nitrogen.
C. Slope piping in direction of flow.
D. Install strainers on inlet side of pressure reducing valves. Provide main gas valves (pressure
reducing or flow control) with by-passes and isolation valves to permit maintenance without
interruption of gas.
3.6 LIQUID NITROGEN

A. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.


B. Minimize field fabricated joints.
C. Provide safety relief valves between shut-off valves and in any other part of the system where
liquid can be contained and vaporize into a gas due to heat loss.
D. Allow for piping system contraction by use of expansion/contraction loops or internal bellows
fittings.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS
22 10 05 - 6
SECTION 22 10 06
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Piping system components, materials and limitations.


B. Testing and cleaning.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 22 10 05 - Building Services and Process Piping Systems, for application of piping
schedules to various systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Follow Section 01 33 00.


B. Product Data: Submit schedule identifying each product; sizes, materials, and capacities.
Additional test report information to verify materials are manufactured to specified standards
may be requested.
C. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including
printed statement of VOC content.
D. Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
2. Certifications:
a. Certify that specified field tests have been performed and that work meets or exceeds
specified requirements.
b. Certify that systems have been disinfected as specified.
3. Field test reports.
4. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include assembly views, lubrication instructions, and
replacement parts list.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Follow Section 01 65 00.


B. Store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
C. Protect flange faces from damage with wood, plastic or soft metal.
D. Protect pipe threads from damage with plastic caps.
E. Handle glass piping so as to avoid scratching or abrading surfaces. Damaged piping will not be
approved.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of manufacturer name, country, date
of manufacture, and specified testing agency or standard the material meets.
B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components coming into contact
with potable water.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 1
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Follow Section 01 77 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE SYSTEMS MATERIALS

A. Follow piping schedules at end of this Section.


B. DESIGN STANDARD MANUFACTURER: Manufacturers or model numbers listed are the
design standards. Unless specifically stated otherwise, substitutions are [not permitted]
[permitted subject to Section 00 26 00].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

A. Follow Section 22 05 05 and 22 10 06.


3.2 FIELD TESTING

A. Alert Owner, CM and all trades as to the areas and systems being tested to ensure safety in the
event of a possible failure.
B. Test systems before covering or concealment.
C. Flush piping systems before testing.
D. Should leaks occur during testing, stop test, repair leaks, and repeat entire test from the
beginning.
E. Repair damage caused by leaks, flooding, or draining.
F. Separately test above and below grade drainage systems.
G. For high rise or large systems, they may be tested in sections provided additional valves and
fittings are provided to isolate and test the sections.
H. Unless otherwise required by local authorities having jurisdiction, follow testing procedures
scheduled.
3.3 TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR PIPING SCHEDULES

SCHEDULE SERVICE

P-1.1 Sanitary Waste below grade


Storm Water below grade

P-1.2 Sanitary Waste above grade


Storm Water above grade

P-2.1 Incoming Water Service below grade


Pumped Sanitary Waste below grade
Pumped Storm Water below grade
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 2
P-2.4 Sanitary Waste Pump Discharge
Storm Water Pump Discharge
Laboratory Waste Pump Discharge

P-3.3 Sanitary Waste Pump Discharge above grade


Storm Water Pump Discharge above grade

P-3.4 Sanitary Waste above grade


Storm Water above grade

P-3.5 Domestic Use Water above grade 6 inches and larger


Laboratory Use Water above grade 6 inches and larger

P-3.7 Laboratory Vacuum 6 inches and larger (Module M)


Laboratory Vacuum Exhaust 6 inches and larger

P-3.10 Sanitary Waste Pump Discharge above grade 2 inches and smaller
Storm Water Pump Discharge above grade 2 inches and smaller

P-4.2 Argon Gas


Carbon Dioxide Gas
Hydrogen Gas

P-5.1 Domestic Use Water above grade 4 inches and smaller


Laboratory Use Water above grade 4 inches and smaller
Tempered Water

P-5.2 Sanitary Indirect Waste

P-5.3 Domestic Water below grade 2 inches and smaller


Brine below grade 2 inches and smaller

P-5.4 Laboratory Vacuum (Module N)


Laboratory Vacuum Exhaust

P-5.7 Laboratory Vacuum 4 inches and smaller (Module M)


Laboratory Vacuum Exhaust 4 inches and smaller

P-5.8 Compressed Air


Nitrogen Gas
High Pressure Compressed Air
High Pressure Nitrogen Gas

P-5.12 Domestic Use Water above grade 3 inches and larger


Laboratory Use Water above grade 3 inches and larger

P-6.1 Laboratory Waste above grade to 1 foot below grade


Laboratory Indirect Waste

P-6.3 Laboratory Chilled Water

P-6.5 Laboratory Waste more than 1 foot below grade

P-6.8 Laboratory Waste above grade (Double Contained)

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 3
P-8.1 Testing and Cleaning

P-8.2 Disinfecting

P-8.3 Testing and Cleaning

P-8.4 Testing and Cleaning

P-8.5 Testing and Cleaning

P-8.6 Testing and Cleaning

P-8.10 Testing and Cleaning

END OF SECTION

See Piping Schedules following this page, on pages 5 through 27 26, which are part of this Section.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 4
SCHEDULE P-1.1

A. Service:
1. Sanitary waste below grade.
2. Storm water below grade.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: Gravity Vented.
2. Temperature: 140 degrees F (60 degrees C).
C. Pipe: Bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe; ASTM A74 and NSF International
listed.
D. Joints: Neoprene rubber compression-type gaskets; ASTM C564.
E. Fittings: Bell and spigot, cast iron; ASTM/ANSI A74 and NSF International listed.
F. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.3.

SCHEDULE P-1.2

A. Service:
1. Sanitary waste above grade.
2. Storm water above grade.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: Gravity vented.
2. Temperature: 140 degrees F.
C. Pipe: 15 inch and smaller; hubless, cast iron soil pipe; ASTM A888, CISPI 301 and NSF
International listed.
D. Joints: No hub, stainless steel coupling assembly; CISPI 310 with neoprene rubber gasket
ASTM C564.
E. Fittings: Hubless, cast iron; ASTM A888, CISPI 301 and NSF International listed.
F. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.4.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 5
SCHEDULE P-2.1

A. Service: Incoming water service below grade.


B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 100 psig.
2. Temperature: 200 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Ductile iron pressure pipe; Class 52, bituminous coated outside; AWWA C151/ANSI
A21.51. All components of system for water service shall conform to NSF-61.
D. Lining: Cement-mortar; AWWA C104/ANSI A21.4, NSF-61.
E. Joints: Mechanical, or push-on type; AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11.
F. Fittings: Mechanical joint, ductile iron, bituminous coated outside; AWWA C110/ANSI
A21.10. Cement lined; ANSI A21.4.
G. Gaskets: Molded rubber compression type for push on joint, ANSI A21.11 and/or full face for
flanged joints, 1/8 inch thick rubber, gasket ID must match pipe ID.
H. Bolting: Tee-head bolts and hex nuts, material and threading, ANSI A21.11.
I. Lubricant, If Required: ANSI A21.11.
J. Mechanical Joint Installation: ANSI A21.11.
K. Test and Clean Sanitary and Storm Lines: Follow Schedule P-8.1.
L. Disinfect Incoming Water Service: Follow Schedule P-8.2.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 6
SCHEDULE P-2.4

A. Service:
1. Sanitary waste pump discharge.
2. Storm water pump discharge.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 100 psig.
2. Temperature: 200 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Ductile iron pressure pipe, asphaltic paint; AWWA C151/ANSI A21.51.
D. Lining: Fusion-Bonded epoxy; AWWA C116, NSF-61.
E. Joints: Mechanical, or push-on type; AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11. Flanged; AWWA /ANSI
C115/A21.15 & C110/A21.10.
F. Fittings: Ductile iron; AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10.
G. Flanges: 125 pound, ductile iron; ASA Class 125.
H. Gaskets: Molded rubber ANSI Full face, 1/8 inch thick rubber, gasket ID must match pipe ID.
I. Gate Valves: 125 pound, cast iron, bronze mounted, non-rising stem, flanged ends. Nibco
Figure F-619.
J. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.1.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 7
SCHEDULE P-3.3

A. Service:
1. Sanitary waste pump discharge above grade.
2. Storm water pump discharge above grade.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 100 psig.
2. Temperature: 200 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Schedule 40 ERW or seamless steel, galvanized; ASTM A53; Grade B.
D. Joints: Flanged or rolled grooved.
E. Joint Coupling: Malleable or ductile iron, Victaulic type zero-flex rigid coupling, galvanized
with grade E, type A flush seal gasket; ASTM A47 and A536.
F. Fittings: Standard weight galvanized steel, grooved mechanical joint, flanged at valve and
equipment connections, long radius elbows.
G. Flanges: Class 125, cast iron, galvanized; ASTM A126 and ANSI B16.1.
H. Flange Gaskets: Molded rubber ANSI Full face, 1/8 inch thick rubber, gasket ID must match
pipe ID.
I. Gate Valves:
1. 2 Inch and Smaller: Class 125, bronze, non-rising stem, threaded ends, Nibco Figure T-113.
2. 3 Inch and Larger: Class 125, cast iron, bronze mounted, non-rising stem, flanged ends.
Nibco Figure F-619.
J. Check Valves: 3-inch through 12-inch: 175 pound, cast iron body, ductile iron cap, bronze or
ductile iron disc. ductile iron hinge, stainless steel shaft, nitrile seat, zinc plated steel hardware,
lever and spring, grooved ends, provide optional drain and pressure taps with bronze plugs,
AWWA C606; Victaulic Series 317 AWWA Check Valve.
K. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.1.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 8
SCHEDULE P-3.4

A. Service:
1. Sanitary waste above grade.
2. Storm water above grade.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: Gravity vented.
2. Temperature: 140 degrees F.
C. Pipe; 10 Inch and Larger: Schedule 40, welded or seamless steel, galvanized; ASTM A53,
Grade B.
D. Joints: Rolled grooved.
E. Fittings: Malleable or ductile iron drainage fittings, long radius, grooved mechanical joint,
galvanized; ASTM A47 or A536.
F. Couplings: Malleable or ductile iron, Victaulic type zero-flex rigid coupling, galvanized with
grade E, type A flush seal gasket; ASTM A47 or A536.
G. Transition Couplings: Powerseal Model 3501, or Dresser type style 38.
H. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.4.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 9
SCHEDULE P-3.5

A. Service:
1. Domestic use water above grade 6 inch and larger.
2. Laboratory use water above grade 6 inch and larger.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 150 psig.
2. Temperature: 150 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Schedule 40 ERW or seamless steel, galvanized; ASTM A53, Grade B. All components
of system shall conform to NSF-61.
D. Joints: Rolled grooved.
E. Fittings: Malleable or ductile iron, galvanized, long radius, grooved mechanical joint; ASTM
A47 or A536.
F. Couplings: Malleable or ductile iron, Victaulic type zero-flex rigid coupling, galvanized with
grade E gaskets; ASTM A47 or A536.
G. Flanges: Class 125, Malleable iron, galvanized; ASTM A47. Victaulic style 741.
H. Flange Gaskets: Molded rubber ANSI Full face, 1/8 inch thick rubber, gasket ID must match
pipe ID.
I. Gate Valves: Class 125, 200 psi, cast iron, non-rising stem, full port, flanged ends. Nibco
Figure F-619.
J. Check Valves: Class 125, 200 psi, cast iron body, swing check, renewable bronze disc and
plugs, flanged ends. Nibco Figure F-918-B.
K. Butterfly Valves: 200 psi ductile iron body lug style, aluminum bronze disc, EPDM seat, multi-
position locking handle, gear operated above 6 inch size. Provide with chain-wheel where
specified. Nibco 2000 Series.
L. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.1.
M. Disinfect: Follow Schedule P-8.2.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 10
SCHEDULE P-3.7

A. Service:
1. Laboratory vacuum 6 inch and larger (Module M).
2. Laboratory vacuum exhaust 6 inch and larger.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 150 psig.
2. Temperature: 225 degrees F.
C. Pipe:
1. 6 Inch and Larger: Schedule 20 carbon steel, beveled ends, welded or seamless; ASTM
A53, grade B, and ANSI B36.10.
D. Joints: Butt welded, flanged at valves.
E. Fittings: Schedule 20 carbon steel, butt-welded.
F. Shut-off Valves: Class 150, butterfly valve, lug style carbon steel body, 316 stainless steel disk
and shaft, teflon seat and seal. Gear operated. Jamesbury Figure 815LHV-11-2236-TT.
G. Dielectric Fittings: Isolation flanges. EPCO Sales, Inc.
H. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.5.

SCHEDULE P-3.10

A. Service:
1. Sanitary waste pump discharge above grade 2 inches and smaller.
2. Storm water pump discharge above grade 2 inches and smaller.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 100 psig.
2. Temperature: 200 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Schedule 40 ERW or seamless steel, galvanized; ASTM A53, Grade B.
D. Joints: Threaded.
E. Fittings: Class 125, cast iron, threaded, galvanized; ASTM A126, ANSI B16.4.
F. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze, non-rising stem, threaded ends. Nibco Figure T-113.
G. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.1.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 11
SCHEDULE P-4.2

A. Service:
1. Argon gas.
2. Carbon Dioxide gas.
3. Hydrogen gas.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 300 psig.
2. Temperature: 150 degrees F.
C. Tubing:
1. 316L stainless steel, O.D. tube, seamless or welded, Brinnell hardness of 80 RB or less for
bending, electropolished interior, [20Ra], mill finish exterior, cleaned for oxygen service,
capped and bagged, ASTM A269 or A270 or A632, G93 and CGA-4.1.
2. Pipe Size and Wall Thickness:
1/4 Inch 0.028 Inch
3/8 Inch 0.049 Inch
1/2 Inch 0.065 Inch
3/4 Inch 0.083 Inch
1 Inch 0.095 Inch
D. Joints: Double ferrule compression joint.
E. Fittings: Use tube bends as much as possible to avoid the use of fittings. Where required use
tube fittings with double ferrule compression joint ends, 316 stainless steel, cleaned for oxygen
service. Swagelok, Tube Fittings or approved equal by Parker. Fittings are to be factory capped
and bagged.
F. Ball Valves:
1. 1/2 inch: 2500 pound, ball type, 316 stainless steel body and ball, full port, butt weld
schedule 5 ends, PTFE seat, PTFE & graphite seals, grade 8 bolts, tie rods and nuts, handle
with locking device, pre-cleaned and capped, rated for oxygen service. Jamesbury Figure
4FBO-3600TT-2.
2. 3/4 inch and 1 inch: 2500 pound, ball type, 316 stainless steel body and ball, full port, butt
weld schedule 5 ends, PTFE seat, PTFE & graphite seals, grade 8 bolts, tie rods and nuts,
handle with locking device, pre-cleaned and capped, rated for oxygen service. Jamesbury
Figure 4KBO-3600TT-2.
G. Exposed Supports within Laboratories: Virgin polypropylene block type supports with 304
stainless steel hardware consisting of bolts, cover plate, weld plate, elongated weld plate,
mounting rail, rail and strut nuts. Swagelok Support System.
H. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.10.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 12
SCHEDULE P-5.1

A. Service:
1. Domestic use water above grade 4 inch and smaller.
2. Laboratory use water above grade 4 inch and smaller.
3. Tempered water.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 150 psig.
2. Temperature: 150 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tubing, ASTM B88. All components of system shall
conform to NSF-61.
D. Joints: Soldered with grade HB lead-free solder (lead content not more than 0.1 percent); ASTM
B32, ANSI/AWS A5.8; J. W. Harris, Bridgit.
E. Fittings: Wrought copper, soldered ends; ANSI B16.22.
F. Flanges: 150 psi, cast bronze, flat face; ANSI B16.18.
G. Gaskets: Full face, 1/8 inch thick rubber, gasket ID must match pipe ID.
H. Ball Valves, 2 Inch and Smaller: 600 psi WOG serviceable in line, three piece bronze body, full
port, soldered connections, stainless steel ball, TFE seats, fluorocarbon rubber seals, extended
lever handle; MSS SP-110. Nibco Figure S-595-Y-66-LF.
I. Keylock Valves: Same as ball valve except with locking handle.
J. Gate Valves:
1. 3 Inch and Larger: Class 125, 200 psi, cast iron, bolted bonet, non-rising stem, solid wedge,
flanged ends. MSS SP-70; Nibco Figure F-619.
K. Check Valves:
1. 2 Inch and Smaller: Class 125, 200 psi, cast iron body, horizontal, wye pattern swing check,
renewable bronze disc, soldered connections. MSS SP-80; Nibco Figure S-413-Y-LF.
2. 3 Inch and Larger: Class 125, 200 psi, bronze, horizontal swing check, renewable bronze
disc and plugs, flanged ends, MSS SP-125; Nibco Figure F-910-B-LF.
L. Butterfly Valves, 3 Inch and Larger: 200 psi ductile iron body lug style, aluminum bronze disc,
EPDM seat, multi-position locking handle. MSS SP-67; Nibco LD Figure 2000.
M. Drain Valves: 1/2 Inch and 3/4 inch: 600 psi WOG, two piece bronze body, full port, soldered
connection on one end and 3/4 inch hose connection with cap and chain on the other, stainless
steel ball, TFE seats and packing, extended lever handle; MSS SP-110. Nibco Figure S-585-70-
66-LF.
N. Dielectric fittings: Flanges: Female iron pipe thread by solder connections, grey iron, steel,
brass and copper, complete with gasket, insulating washers, bolt insulators and hardware; Watts
Regulator Series 3100. Waterways: Zinc electroplated steel pipe with high temperature stabilized
polyethylene liner, threaded or grooved ends; Victaulic Style 47.
O. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.1.
P. Disinfect: Follow Schedule P-8.2.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 13
SCHEDULE P-5.2

A. Service: Sanitary indirect waste.


B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: Gravity vented.
2. Temperature: 140 degrees F.
C. Pipe; 2 Inch and Smaller: Type DWV copper drainage tubing; ASTM B306.
D. Joints: Soldered with grade HB lead-free solder (lead content not more than 0.1 percent); ASTM
B32, ANSI/AWS A5.8. J. W. Harris, Bridgit.
E. Fittings: Cast bronze, drainage; ANSI B16.23.
F. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.4.

SCHEDULE P-5.3

A. Service: Domestic water below grade 2 inch and smaller.


B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 150 psig.
2. Temperature: 150 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Type K soft annealed seamless copper tubing; ASTM B88. All components of system
shall conform to NSF-61.
D. Joints: Soldered with grade HB lead-free solder (lead content not more than 0.1 percent); ASTM
B32, ANSI/AWS A5.8. J. W. Harris, Bridgit, or Flared; ANSI B16.26.
E. Fittings: Wrought copper soldered joint; ANSI B16.22, or Flared, cast copper alloy fittings;
ANSI B16.26.
F. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.1.
G. Disinfect: Follow Schedule P-8.2.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 14
SCHEDULE P-5.4

A. Service:
1. Laboratory vacuum (Module N).
2. Laboratory vacuum exhaust.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 150 psig.
2. Temperature: 150 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tubing; ASTM B88.
D. Joints: Solder with grade HB lead-free solder (lead content not more than 0.1 percent); ASTM
B32, ANSI/AWS A5.8. J. W. Harris, Bridgit.
E. Fittings: Wrought copper soldered ends; ANSI B16.22.
F. Valves:
1. 2 Inch and Smaller: 600 psi WOG, three piece bronze body, soldered connections, stainless
steel ball and trim, full port, teflon seals, seat and O-ring packing, lever handle; FS WW-V-
35. Nibco S-595-Y-66.
2. 3 Inch and larger: 200 psi ductile iron body lug style, aluminum bronze disc, EPDM seat,
multi-position locking handle. MSS SP-67; Nibco LC 2000.
G. Drain Valves: 1/2 Inch and 3/4 inch: 600 psi WOG, two piece bronze body, full port, soldered
connection on one end and 3/4 inch hose connection with cap and chain on the other, stainless
steel ball, TFE seats and packing, lever handle; MSS SP-110. Nibco Figure S-585-70-66-HC.
H. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.5.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 15
SCHEDULE P-5.7

A. Service:
1. Laboratory vacuum 4 inch and smaller (Module M).
2. Laboratory vacuum exhaust 4 inch and smaller.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 150 psig.
2. Temperature: 225 degrees F.
C. Tubing: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tubing; ASTM B88.
D. Joints:
1. Brazed with alloy, classification BCuP5 (15 percent silver, 80 percent copper, 5 percent
phosphorous); ANSI/AWS A5.8. Brazed or flanged at valves.
2. Threaded joints are prohibited, except for final connection to outlet.
E. Fittings: Wrought copper, solder cup ends; ANSI B16.22.
F. Valves:
1. 2 Inch and Smaller: Class 150, ball valve, carbon steel body, standard port, flanged ends,
316 stainless steel trim, teflon seats and seals, [lockable] lever handle. Jamesbury Figure
5150V-31-2236-TT.
2. 3 Inch and 4 Inch: Class 150, ball valve, carbon steel body, standard port, flanged ends, 316
stainless steel trim, teflon seats and seals, lever handle. Jamesbury Figure 7150V-31-2236-
TT.
G. Dielectric Fittings: Isolation flanges. EPCO Sales, Inc.
H. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.5.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 16
SCHEDULE P-5.8

A. Service:
1. Compressed air.
2. Nitrogen gas.
3. High pressure compressed air.
4. High pressure nitrogen gas.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 150 psig.
2. Temperature: 150 degrees F.
C. Tubing: Hard drawn seamless copper tubing, factory oxygen cleaned, nitrogenized, capped and
bagged, Type K; ASTM B819.
D. Joints: Brazed with alloy classification BCuP5 (15 percent silver, 5 percent phosphorous, 80
percent copper), with continuous nitrogen gas purge; ANSI/AWS A5.8.
E. Fittings: Wrought copper, solder cup ends, factory oxygen cleaned, nitrogenized, capped and
bagged; ANSI B16.22.
F. Ball Valves: 400 psi WOG, three piece bronze body, with tubing extensions, stainless steel ball,
full port, teflon seal, seat and O-ring packing, lever handle, factory oxygen cleaned and capped;
MSS SP-10. Nibco CS-595-YX-66 Series.
G. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.6.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 17
SCHEDULE P-5.12

A. Service:
1. Domestic use water above grade 3 inch and larger.
2. Laboratory use water above grade 3 inch and larger.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 200 psig .
2. Temperature: 150 degrees F .
C. Pipe: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tubing, ASTM B88. All components of system shall
conform to NSF-61.
D. Joints: Rolled groove.
E. Fittings: Wrought copper or cast bronze, grooved ends. Victaulic CTS Copper Grooved Piping
System. Pressure gauge and thermometer connections; braze a bronze thread-o-let to the tubing
or use a coupling, if available.
F. Couplings: Ductile iron with copper color alkyd enamel paint coating; ASTM A-536 Grade 65-
45-12. Victaulic Style 606.
G. Gaskets: Synthetic rubber, Grade E EPDM, flush seal design, conforming to copper tube sizes;
ASTM D-2000, ANSI/NSF 61.
H. Flanges: Class 150, 200 psi , cast bronze; ANSI B16.18.
I. Gate Valves: 4 Inch and larger: 300 psi , cast iron, bolted bonnet, resilient wedge, non-rising
stem, full port, flanged ends. MSS SP-70. Nibco Figure F-619-RWS.
J. Check Valves: 3 Inch through 8 Inch : Class 125, 200 psi , cast iron body, bronze, swing check,
renewable bronze disc and plugs, flanged ends, Nibco Figure F-910-B-LF.
K. Butterfly Valves, 3 Inch : through 8 Inch : 300 psi polymid ductile iron body, grooved ends,
buna rubber encapsulated ductile iron disc, 416 stainless steel stem, TFE upper bushing, bronze
lower bushing multi-position locking handle for 4 inch and smaller, manual gear operator for 6
inch and larger. MSS SP-25 & 67. Nibco Figure LC-2000.
L. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.1.
M. Disinfect: Follow Schedule P-8.2.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 18
SCHEDULE P-6.1

A. Service:
1. Laboratory waste above grade to 1 foot below grade.
2. Laboratory indirect waste.
B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: Gravity vented.
2. Temperature: 180 degrees F.
C. Pipe:
1. Schedule 40, Polypropylene Pipe; ASTM D2146/D4101 Flame retardant; D635. George
Fisher Fuseal or Enfield, Zurn, or Orion.
2. In plenum ceiling areas: Schedule 40, Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Pipe; UL 94-VO
listed, ASTM D2146/D4101 Flame retardant; D635. George Fisher Fuseal 25/50 or Enfield,
Zurn or Orion.
D. Joints: Mechanical for accessible sink traps and for accessible piping within laboratory rooms.
Use electronic resistance fusion joints elsewhere.
E. Fittings:
1. Schedule 40 Polypropylene; ASTM D2146/D4101, flame retardant.
2. Schedule 40 Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF); UL 94-VO listed, ASTM D2146/D4101,
flame retardant.
F. Butterfly Valves: Size 2-1/2 inch to 8 inch: Polypropylene body and disc, stainless steel stem,
EPDM seat. Lever handle to 4 inch size, gear operator for 6 inch and larger, ASTM D4101,
Asahi America Type 56.
G. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.4.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 19
SCHEDULE P-6.3

A. Service: Laboratory chilled water.


B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: 50 psig.
2. Temperature: 70 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Schedule 80, CPVC; ASTM D2846. ASTM F441 and ASTM D1784.
D. Joints: Solvent welded.
E. Fittings: Schedule 80, CPVC; ASTM D2846 and ANSI A119.2.
F. Shut-off Valves: Globe or ball type valves, socket ends, CPVC body, CPVC ball and stem;
ASTM D2467.
G. Testing and Cleaning: Follow Schedule P-8.1.
H. Disinfecting: Follow Schedule P-8.2.

SCHEDULE P-6.5

A. Service: Laboratory waste more than 1 foot below grade.


B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: Gravity vented.
2. Temperature: 180 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Schedule 40, polypropylene pipe; ASTM D4101, non-flame retardant. George Fisher
Fuseal, Enfield, Zurn, or Orion.
D. Joints: Electric resistance fusion joints.
E. Fittings: Schedule 40 polypropylene; ASTM D4101.
F. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.4.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 20
SCHEDULE P-6.8

A. Service: Laboratory waste double contained.


B. Maximum Design:
1. Pressure: Gravity vented.
2. Temperature: 180 degrees F.
C. Pipe: Double wall polypropylene:
1. Inner pipe: SDR 32, plain ends, polypropylene pipe; ASTM D4101, non-flame
retardant. George Fisher or Asahi.
2. Outer pipe: SDR 32, polypropylene pipe; ASTM D4101, non-flame retardant. George
Fisher or Asahi.
D. Joints: Thermal or Infrared, butt fusion welded; ANSI/ASTM B31.9.
E. Spiders or spacers: Restrained polypropylene matching inner & outer pipe materials
F. Fittings: Double wall polypropylene matching inner & outer pipe materials, restrained
spiders or spacers, factory molded or fabricated, drainage patterns; ASTM D2837 &
D4101.
G. Flanges: Polypropylene, 150 lb rated, with encapsulated carbon steel backup ring.
H. Hardware: Grade B 304 SS heavy hex machine bolts, each w/ Grade A heavy hex nuts and
washers.
I. Gaskets: Class 150, 1/8 inch thick, full face, EPDM, ASME B16.21.
J. Flange Shields: Transparent polyethylene with snap button fasteners or draw strings.
Advanced Products & Systems Style PE or Ramco Manufacturing.
K. Test and Clean: Follow Schedule P-8.4.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 21
SCHEDULE P-8.1

A. Applies to Schedules: P-2.1, P-2.4, P-3.3, P-3.5, P-3.10, P-5.1, P-5.3, P-5.12, P-6.3.
B. Cleaning:
1. Flush internals of system with water of sufficient velocity and quantity to dislodge sediment
or dirt.
2. Remove flow indicators and flow measuring devices before flushing. Replace after cleaning
is completed.
3. System may be tested in sections. Remove blanks, caps or plugs. Remake joints used in
section testing and record information.
C. Hydrostatic Test:
1. Remove pipe system devices not designed to withstand specified test pressure.
2. After flushing, fill system with water, venting off entrapped air at high points of system.
3. Apply hydrostatic pressure to one and one-half times design pressure or 150 psig, whichever
is greater. Test pressure for Schedules shall not exceed maximum design pressure.
4. Hold test pressure for 4 hours. Systems will be inspected to determine visible leaks or
significant pressure variations. (Temperature variations must be considered.)
5. When hydrostatic test is approved, drain water to storm sewer.
6. Dismantle, clean and reinstall drain valves and strainers.
7. Tabulate and submit test results.
8. Reinstall pipe system devices.
D. Repair of Leaks:
1. Mechanical or Threaded Joints:
a. Tighten joints using discretion or
b. Take joint apart and replace defective material.
2. Soldered Joints: Take joint apart, clean both tube and fitting, and remake joint.
3. Welded Joints:
a. Remove defective weld metal by chipping, grinding, or flame gouging. Reweld
following new work procedure in accordance with ANSI B31.3.
b. Do not repair by adding weld metal to defective area.
4. Plastic Joints: Take joint apart and replace with new material.
5. Retest after repairs.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 22
SCHEDULE P-8.2

A. Applies to Schedules: P-2.1, P-3.5, P-5.1, P-5.3, P-5.12, P-6.3.


B. Disinfecting:
1. Provide 3/4 inch hose connection in water main entering building for disinfecting purposes.
2. Verify quality of water supply used prior to proceeding.
3. Unless otherwise required by governing authorities, disinfect new water lines as follows.
a. Pump sufficient sodium hypochlorite into water main to produce a free available
chlorine residual of not less than 50 ppm throughout system.
b. Proceed upstream from point of chlorine application, opening all faucets and taps until
chlorine is detected. Close faucets and taps when chlorine is evident.
c. When chlorinated water has been brought to every faucet and tap, retain water in
system for at least 24 hours.
d. At end of retention period, open all faucets and taps, and thoroughly flush until chlorine
residual is less than 1.0 ppm.
e. Have water samples analyzed by an approved bacteriological laboratory.
f. When all samples tested conform to applicable regulations, submit certification of
successful completion.
4. If any samples tested indicate presence of coliform organisms, repeat entire procedure.

SCHEDULE P-8.3

A. Applies to Schedule: P-1.1.


B. Cleaning: Flush internals of system with water of sufficient velocity to dislodge sediment and
dirt.
C. Hydrostatic Test:
1. Test Pressure: 10 feet of water.
2. Hold test pressure for 30 minutes without visible leak or significant pressure or level
variations. Temperature fluctuations must be considered. Joints will be inspected.
D. Final Air Test (Unless Waived): Fill traps or plug openings with water. Apply air pressure
equivalent to one inch of water column. System must contain pressure for 15 minutes.
E. Tabulate and submit test results.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 23
SCHEDULE P-8.4

A. Applies to Schedules: P-1.2, P-3.4, P-5.2, P-6.1, P-6.5, P-6.8.


B. Cleaning: Flush internals of system with water of sufficient velocity to dislodge sediment and
dirt.
C. Hydrostatic Test:
1. Test Pressure: 10 feet of water.
2. Hold test pressure for 30 minutes without visible leak or significant pressure or level
variations. Temperature fluctuations must be considered. C/M will inspect joints.
3. For double contained piping, test internal pipe first. Upon successful test drain
internal pipe and then test annular space between inner and outer pipe at same test
pressure of 10 feet of water. Upon successful test drain annular space between inner
and outer piping and allow to dry.
D. Each vertical stack, with its branch waste and vent pipes, may be tested separately by plugging
openings at base of stack.
E. Final Smoke Test (Unless Waived by Authority Having Jurisdiction): After all plumbing
fixtures have been set, and traps filled with water, test connections to prove gastight and
watertight, as follows:
1. Fill traps with water. Introduce a thick pungent smoke, produced by smoke machines(s),
into entire system. When smoke appears at stack openings on roof, close vents and maintain
pressure equivalent to 1 inch water column throughout inspection.
2. If authority having jurisdiction finds that a smoke test is impractical, a peppermint test is
acceptable.
F. Tabulate and submit test results.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 24
SCHEDULE P-8.5

A. Applies to Schedules: P-3.7, P-5.4, P-5.7.


B. Cleaning:
1. Flush internals of system with water of sufficient velocity and quantity to dislodge sediment
or dirt.
2. Remove flow indicators or flow measuring devices before flushing. Replace after cleaning
is completed.
3. System may be tested in sections. Record information on installation and removal of
blanks, plugs, or caps. Remake joints that were blanked or plugged.
C. Hydrostatic Test:
1. Remove pipe system devices not designed to withstand specified test pressure. Replace
after testing is completed.
2. After flushing, fill system with water, venting off entrapped air at high points of system.
3. Apply hydrostatic pressure to one and one-half times design pressure or 50 psig, whichever
is greater.
4. Hold test pressure for 4 hours. C/M will inspect to determine whether there is a visible leak
or significant pressure variation. (Temperature variations must be considered).
5. When hydrostatic test is approved, drain water to storm sewer. For piping systems with
Victaulic gaskets properly vent system before draining to prevent gasket displacement.
6. Dismantle, clean, and reinstall drain valves and strainers.
D. Tabulate and submit test results.
E. Repair of Leaks:
1. Welded Joints:
a. Remove defective weld metal by chipping, grinding, or flame gouging. Reweld
following new work procedure as indicated by ANSI B31.1.
b. Do not repair by adding weld metal to defective area.
2. Threaded Joints:
a. Tighten joints using discretion; or
b. Take joint apart and replace defective material.
c. Do not use caulk.
3. Soldered Joints: Take joint apart, clean both tube and fitting, and remake joint.
4. Grooved Joints: Take joint apart, clean, and check gasket is properly in place. Reassemble.
5. Retest system after repairs.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 25
SCHEDULE P-8.6

A. Applies to Schedule: P-5.8. Test piping in accordance with this Schedule.


B. Cleaning: After installation, but prior to connecting service outlets, blow system clear with dry
oil-free nitrogen gas.
C. Initial Pressure Test:
1. Install service outlets.
2. Pressurize to one and one-half times design pressure or 150 psig, whichever is greater, with
dry oil-free nitrogen gas.
3. Test for leaks using soapy water or other equally effective means.
4. Repair leaks.
D. Standing Pressure Test:
1. Completely assemble outlets and all other gas system components.
2. Test system at 20 percent above design pressure with dry oil-free nitrogen gas.
3. Hold test pressure for 24 hours with source gas shut-off valve closed. Temperature
fluctuations must be considered.
E. Repairs of Leaks:
1. Brazed Joints: Take joint apart, clean both tube and fitting, and remake joint.
2. Retest after repairs.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 26
SCHEDULE P-8.10

A. Applies to Schedules: P-4.2, P-5.4.


B. Cleaning:
1. Purge internals of system with clean dry compressed air of sufficient quantity that will
dislodge sediment or dirt.
2. Remove flow indicating and flow measuring devices before flushing. Replace after
cleaning is completed.
C. Initial Pressure Test:
1. Install service outlets.
2. Pressurize to one and one-half times design pressure or 150 psig, whichever is greater, with
dry oil-free compressed air.
3. Test for leaks using soapy water or other equally effective means.
4. Repair leaks.
D. Standing Pressure Test:
1. Completely assemble outlets and all other components.
2. Test system at 20 percent above design pressure or 66 psig, whichever is greater, with dry
oil-free compressed air.
3. Hold test for 24 hours with source shut-off valve closed. Temperature fluctuations must be
considered. C/M will inspect joints.
E. Repair of Leaks:
1. Mechanical or Threaded Joints:
a. Tighten joints using discretion, or
b. Take joint apart and replace defective material.
2. Soldered Joints: Take joint apart, clean both tube and fitting, and remake joint.
3. Welded Joints:
a. Remove defective weld metal by chipping, grinding or flame gouging. Reweld
following new work procedure in accordance with ANSI B31.3.
b. Do not repair by adding weld metal to defective area.
4. Plastic Joints: Take joint apart and replace with new material.
5. Retest after repairs.

END OF SCHEDULES

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
BUILDING SERVICES AND PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULES
22 10 06 - 27
SECTION 22 10 19
PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hose bibbs (interior).


B. Mixing valves.
C. Water hammer arrestors.
D. Pressure reducing valves (water service, direct acting).
E. Pressure reducing valves (water service, hydraulic control).
F. Pressure reducing valves (gases).
G. Vacuum relief valves.
H. Strainers.
I. Flow balancing valves and meters.
J. Backflow preventers (reduced pressure type).
K. Backflow preventers (atmospheric type).
L. Trap primers.
M. Fixed air gaps.
N. Automatic air vents.
O. Tempered water blending station for safety showers and eyewashes.
P. Water Meter.
Q. Roof hydrants.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Follow Section 01 33 00.


B. Product Data: Describe each product specified.
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Follow Sections 22 05 05 and 22 10 05.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. DESIGN STANDARD MANUFACTURER: Manufacturers or model numbers listed are the


design standards. Unless specifically stated otherwise, substitutions are not permitted.
2.2 HOSE BIBBS (INTERIOR COLD WATER)

A. Manufacturers:
1. Chicago Faucet, Model 387-RCF-VB.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 19 - 1
2. T&S Brass, Model 0737-RGH.
B. Lead-free brass faucet with vacuum breaker suitable for 125 psi service with wheel handle and
wing elbow for bolting to wall. 3/4 inch threaded inlet and 3/4 inch threaded hose outlet.
Finish: Rough chrome plated in finished areas.
2.3 HOSE BIBBS (INTERIOR COLD WATER)

A. Manufacturers:
1. Nibco, Figure QT63X with Vacuum Breaker.
2. Red and White Valve, RW-315AB with Vacuum Breaker.
3. American Valve, MC71QT with MVB Vacuum Breaker.
4. Matco Norca Co., Model 646BVLF with Vacuum Breaker.
B. Lead-free brass faucet with vacuum breaker suitable for 125 psi service with tee handle ball
valve, 3/4 inch threaded inlet and 3/4 inch threaded hose outlet. Vacuum breaker, Watts Model
8. Finish: Rough brass in unfinished areas.
2.4 MIXING VALVES

A. Manufacturers:
1. Powers, Series LFMM430 HydroGuard.
2. Lawler Manufacturing Inc., Series 801 thru 805.
3. Acorn Engineering, MV17 Series.
B. Thermostatic type master mixing valve, adjustable 40 to 160 degrees F set point range, capable
of compensating for temperature fluctuations based upon inlet temperature and/or pressure
changes, rough lead-free brass body with non-corrosive parts, poppet design, quick acting
actuator, union inlets with checkstops and strainers; ASSE 1017 and CSA B125.
2.5 MIXING VALVE STATION

A. Manufacturers:
1. Powers, Series LFMM430 HydroGuard Hi/Lo.
2. Lawler Manufacturing, Inc., Series 800.
3. Acorn Engineering, SFMV Series.
B. Factory assembled and fully tested, high/low thermostatic type mixing valve assembly with
pressure regulated low flow, adjustable 40 to 160 degrees F set point range, capable of
compensating for temperature fluctuations based upon inlet temperature and/or pressure
changes, rough lead-free brass body with non-corrosive parts, poppet design, quick acting
actuator, union inlets with checkstops and strainers, brass body pressure regulator, brass ball
valves, pressure and temperature gauges; ASSE 1017 and CSA B125.
2.6 LAVATORY TEMPERING VALVE

A. Manufacturers:
1. Powers, Series LFe480 HydroGuard.
2. Lawler Manufacturing Inc., Model 570.
3. Acorn Engineering, ST70 Series.
B. Thermostatic type mixing valve for multiple lavatory installations, adjustable 80 to 120 degrees
F set point range, capable of compensating for temperature fluctuations based upon inlet
temperature and/or pressure changes, rough lead-free brass body with non-corrosive parts,
poppet design, quick acting actuator, checkstops with integral strainers, compression or NPT
male connections; ASSE 1070 and CSA B125.
2.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith, Hydotrol Series 5000.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 19 - 2
2. Josam.
3. Wade.
4. Zurn.
B. Conform to ASSE Standard 10 Size units in accordance with PDI Standard WH20 Units shall
control and absorb hydrostatic shock pressure of piping system. Field manufactured water
hammer arresters are not approved.
2.8 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (WATER SERVICE, DIRECT ACTING)

A. Manufacturers:
1. Cash Company.
2. Cla-Val Company, Model 990.
3. Watts Regulator Company, Series U5 and 223.
B. Cast lead-free bronze body, stainless steel seat, neoprene diaphragm, adjusting screw regulating
spring tension to set discharge pressure.
2.9 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (WATER SERVICE, HYDRAULIC CONTROL)

A. Manufacturers:
1. Cla-Val Company, Model 90.
2. Bermad Inc., Series 720.
3. Watts Regulator Company, Series 115.
B. Cast iron globe style body with Class 125 flanged ends. Fused on epoxy coating inside and out,
brass trim, stainless steel stem and spring, Buna-N diaphragm, copper and brass control
components and piping.
2.10 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (COMPRESSED AIR AND GASES)

A. Manufacturers:
1. Norgren Co., R17 Series.
2. Watts Fluid Air, R119 Series.
3. Wilkerson Corp., R-Series.
B. Zinc body with threaded ends, aluminum spring cage with spring adjustment mechanism.
Reduced pressure range of 2-125 psig. Provide 0-160psig pressure gauge.
2.11 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (COMPRESSED AIR AND GASES, OXYGEN
CLEANED APPLICATIONS)

A. Manufacturers:
1. Tescom Corp., DH Series.
2. ITT Conoflow.
B. High purity and high flow pressure regulator, 300 psig inlet pressure rated, 0 to 150 psig outlet
pressure, brass body, NPT ends, oxygen cleaned. spring loaded hand knob, Ethylene Propylene
O-ring and valve seat, ethylene propylene/nylon reinforced diaphragm, non-venting, 1/4 inch
female swivel gauge port with 2 inch diameter, 316 stainless steel high purity gauge.
2.12 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES

A. Manufacturers:
1. W. Cash Valve Co., Model VR-801.
2. Conbraco Industries Inc., Series 37-200.
3. Watts Regulator Company, Model N36.
B. Bronze body, opens on vacuum of not over 2 inch mercury column. Disc guide located out of
water, test and rated ANSI Z21.22, certified by AG.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 19 - 3
2.13 STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Apollo Valve, Model YB 59LF Series.
2. Mueller Steam Specialty, Model LF351.
3. Red-White Valve Corp., Figure 383AB.
4. Watts Regulator (Models as specified).
B. Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Lead-free brass body screwed ends, Y pattern with number 20 mesh
type 304 stainless steel perforated screen, tapped drain/blow-down connection and plug,
minimum 200 psi WOG; Model 777S.
C. Size 2-1/2 Inch to 8 Inch: Cast iron body, FDA approved fused epoxy coating on interior,
flanged ends, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen, tapped drain/blow-down
connection and plug, Class 125 (200 psi WOG); Model 77F-DI-FDA-125.
D. Provide blowdown valves as ball valves specified with piping material schedule.
2.14 FLOW BALANCING VALVES AND METERS (INDICATORS)

A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong, Series CBV-VS-LF.
2. Bell & Gossett, Model CB Circuit Setter Plus.
3. Watts Water Technologies, LFCSM-61-S.
B. Balance Valve: Calibrated lead-free brass construction with provisions for connecting a portable
differential pressure meter.
1. Provide meter connection with built-in check valves.
2. An integral pointer shall register degree of valve opening.
3. Construct valves with internal seals to prevent leakage around rotation element.
4. Calibrated curve and determine flow rate by means of pressure drop and valve setting.
5. Construct valves for 300 psi working pressure at 250 degrees F. Provide insulation suitable
for use on heating and cooling systems.
C. Meter: Portable differential meter, with provisions for hanging and that will indicate readings in
feet of water. Bell and Gossett Model RO-3, or approved equal.
D. Accuracy + 1.0 percent full scale.
E. Provide necessary shutoff valves and purge valves.
F. Provide hoses (10 feet long) with leak proof threaded connections, suitable for working pressure
for 125 psi at 250 degrees F.
2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS (REDUCED PRESSURE TYPE)

A. Manufacturers:
1. Cla-Val Co.
2. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
3. Hersey Products, Inc.
4. Watts Regulator Company, Series LF909.
B. 3/4 Inch to 2 Inches: Lead-free brass body, tight-seating rubber check valve and relief valve
assemblies, bronze body ball valve test cocks and strainer, bronze ball shut-off valves.
C. 3 Inches to 10 Inches: FDA approved epoxy coated, cast iron check valve bodies with bronze
seats, cast iron relief valve with stainless steel trim, bronze body ball valve test cocks and epoxy
coated cast iron strainer, resilient wedge gate valve shut-off valves.
D. Conform to ASSE Standard 1013 for reduced pressure principal backflow preventers.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 19 - 4
2.16 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS (ATMOSPHERIC TYPE)

A. Manufacturers:
1. W. Cash Valve Company.
2. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
3. Watts Regulator Company, Model 8
B. Brass body with rubber-to-rubber seating design; male threads at one end and female threads on
opposite end; suitable for hose bibbs and wall hydrants. Conform to ASSE Standard 1011.
C. Conform to ASSE Standard 1011 and ANSI A112.1.3.
2.17 TRAP PRIMERS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Single Non-powered Trap Primers: Machined brass with 1/2 inch NPT male connections.
EPDM O-rings, No. 60 stainless steel mesh inlet screen. Precision Plumbing Product
Company Model P-1.
2. Single Electronic Multiple Trap Primers: Electronic trap priming manifold which will
supply a minimum of 2 ounces of potable water at 20 psig for 6 seconds every 24 hours.
Timer shall allow adjustment in field. Manifold shall have a 1/2-inch inlet ball valve,
solenoid valve, vacuum breaker meeting ASSE 1001 and outlet manifold with 5/8-inch
compression coupling for drain. Tubing shall be type L copper with lead free solder joints.
Electrical components shall include a circuit breaker, manual over ride switch/test button
and timer all meeting UL listing. 120V/1PH/60HZ power, 0.13 amp hold current, 0.23 amp
in-rush current. With distribution units. Precision Plumbing Product Company Model MP-
500-115V.
B. Standards: ASSE Standard 1018.
2.18 FIXED AIR GAPS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith, Series 3950.
2. Josam.
3. Wade.
4. Zurn.
B. Cast iron body with air gap equal to two times inlet pipe size.
2.19 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong.
2. Bell & Gossett.
3. Crane.
4. Spirax Sarco, Model 13WS.
B. Float operated (normally open) suitable for 150 psi maximum water pressure service.
2.20 TEMPERED WATER BLENDING STATION FOR SAFETY SHOWERS AND
EYEWASHES

A. Manufacturers:
1. Guardian Equipment, Model G3850.
2. Encon Safety Products, Model No. 37110000.
3. Haws, Model No. TWBS.
4. Western Emergency Equipment, Model No. WTBS.
5. Powers, HydroGuard ES series.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 19 - 5
B. Pre-piped wall mounted blending system for providing tepid water to emergency/safety
equipment with dual mixing valves, low pressure drop relief by-pass (10 psi maximum), anti-
scald shut-off valve, 2 inch connections, inlet and outlet temperature gauges. Shall meet
requirements of ANSI Z358.1 and ASSE 1071.
C. Pre-set assembly at 85 degrees F with 90 degrees F high limit setting.
D. Enclose in corrosion resistant cabinet with window to view gauges.
2.21 WATER METERS

A. Manufacturers:
1. ABB Water Meters, Inc.
2. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Milwaukee, WI).
3. Carlon Meter Co., Inc.
4. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Hersey Products Div.
5. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Water Div.
6. Sensus Technologies, Inc.
7. Other Substitutions are permitted subject to Section 00 26 00.
B. AWWA C701, turbine type, lead free brass or epoxy coated ductile iron case, NSF 61 compliant.
Electronic direct drive register. Registers flow in gallons. Coordinate output with BAS. Meters
must be automatically read by BAS system and record monthly water use for LEED
certification.
C. AWWA C702, compound type, lead-free brass or epoxy coated ductile iron case, NSF 61
compliant. Electronic direct drive register. Registers flow in gallons. Coordinate output with
BAS. Meters must be automatically read by BAS system and record monthly water use for
LEED certification.
2.22 ROOF HYDRANTS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R Smith, Series 5907.
2. Wade Drains, Series 8900-R.
3. Woodford Manufacturing, Model RHY1-MS.
B. Non-freeze roof post hydrant with 3/4 inch dual check vacuum breaker hose adapter
connection, galvanized casing and adjustable flow wheel lock handle with deck flange and
under deck clamp. Include a tapped 1/8 inch threaded drain hole in the valve body below
roof for automatic draining of the casing to prevent freezing, once the hose is removed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Follow Section 01 45 00 for Quality Control of installation.


B. Provide means and methods to anchor items into wall or floor construction.
C. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.
3.2 HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS

A. Locations shown are approximate. Exact mounting heights and locations will be as directed.
B. Install wall hydrants flush with wall.
C. Anchor hose bibbs to wall with corrosive resistant bolts.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 19 - 6
D. For roof hydrants provide a 1/2 inch drain from hole in the valve body and pipe to an
acceptable discharge point for proper draining of the casing to prevent freezing.
3.3 MIXING VALVES

A. Install hot and cold water mixing valves on hot or tempered water systems piped in accordance
with manufacturer’s requirements. Point-of-use mixing valves shall be located within 10 feet of
the fixture being served. Mount mixing valves on wall or supports from structure.
B. When mixing valve is not furnished with integral check valves, provide separate check valves on
inlets to mixing valve. Provide strainers and temperature gauges on cold and hot water supplies
to mixing valve.
C. Check and/or adjust temperature settings for outlet temperature and high limit stop, follow
manufacturer’s instructions.
3.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Install at quick closing valves in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Locate in


areas with access or provide suitable sized access door to allow for servicing or replacement.
3.5 STRAINERS

A. Install strainers where indicated on drawings. Verify there is sufficient clearance for blow down
and servicing. Clean all strainers bi-monthly during construction to assure all debris are
removed from system.
3.6 BALANCING VALVES

A. Install balancing valves as shown on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s


recommendations.
B. Balance flows starting from the closest valve to the furthest valve and check flows on all valves
once complete. Rebalance valves as required to obtain desired flows.
C. Once valves are balanced set memory stops and install pre-molded insulation cover.
D. Install balancing valves in circulating systems where required to proportionate the flow.
3.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Install DWV copper drain line, full size, from backflow preventer relief to nearest drain.
B. Install [reduced pressure type][atmospheric type] backflow preventer at hose end and nozzle
outlets.
3.8 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS

A. Provide isolation valve at inlet to vent for servicing.


B. Provide discharge piping from vent to nearest floor drain or mop receptor.
3.9 WATER METERS

A. Install meters as shown on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.


B. Provide a minimum of 5 pipe diameters of straight pipe run before meter to allow for laminar
flow through meter or as recommended by meter manufacturer. For vortex meter provide 10
pipe diameters before and 5 pipe diameters after.
C. Ensure meter is accessible and enough clearance is provided to disassemble and maintain the
meter and electronics.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 19 - 7
D. Coordinate register type with the BAS system. Meters must be automatically monitored by the
BAS system and record monthly water use in gallons.
3.10 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Install pressure reducing valves (PRV) with sufficient clearance and access.
B. Install an outlet pressure gauge at each PRV or pair of PRVs.
C. Where 3 inch and larger valves are installed provide a 3/4 inch low flow pressure reducing valve
with its outlet pressure set at 5 psi higher than main PRV.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 19 - 8
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Water closets.
B. Urinals.
C. Lavatories.
D. Mop receptors.
E. Electric water coolers.
F. Showers.
G. Sinks.
H. Traps and supplies for kitchen sinks/equipment specified under Section 11 40 00.
I. Traps and supplies for laboratory sinks/equipment specified under Section 12 35 53.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Follow Section 01 33 00.


B. Product Data: Describe fixtures, dimensions, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, flow rates,
accessories, trim and finishes. Make all submittals at one time. Partial submissions will not be
reviewed.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide diagrams showing arrangement of components and installation details
as well as power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Informational Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include data for fixture trim with exploded views and
replacement parts lists.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Water Efficiency Prerequisite for Indoor Water Use Reduction and WE
Credit for Indoor Water Use Reduction: Documentation for each fixture indicating flow and
water consumption requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Coordinate with casework supplier on plumbing fixtures and trim requiring cutouts. Furnish
templates to casework supplier.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
E. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment”.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 1
F. EPA WaterSense®: Provide products which are certified to comply with applicable specification
of the WaterSense® program.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards:
1. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.
2. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.
3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.’
4. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
5. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001
6. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
7. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.
8. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.
9. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
10. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
11. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASSE
1016.
12. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
13. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
14. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
15. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
16. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445.
17. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
18. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
19. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
20. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
21. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
22. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
23. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
24. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
25. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
26. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
27. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Follow Section 22 10 05.


1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents:
1. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but
no fewer than 5 of each type.
3. Toilet Seats: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed.
4. Trap Insulation Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed.
5. Electric Water Cooler Filter Elements: Equal to 1 of each type of filter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. DESIGN STANDARD MANUFACTURERS: Manufacturers or model numbers listed are the


design standards. Substitutions are not permitted.
1. Fixtures (Vitreous Ware): American Standard, Kohler, Sloan, Toto.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 2
2. Fixtures (Stainless Steel): Just Manufacturing, Elkay, Advance Tabco, Amtekco Industries.
3. Fixtures (Solid Surface): Bradley, Sloan, NeoMetro.
4. Seats: American Standard, Olsonite, Bemis, Beneke, Church, Kohler.
5. Mop Receptors: Fiat, Stern/Williams. Florestone.
6. Trim: Bradley, Sloan, Dyson, Speakman, Chicago, American Standard, Delta, Watersaver
Faucet.
7. Carriers: J.R. Smith, Zurn, Wade.
8. Flush Valves: Sloan, Delany, Toto, Zurn.
9. Supply and Traps: McGuire, American Standard, Chicago, Eljer.
10. Shower Heads and Mixing Valves: Powers, Symmons, Speakman.
11. Safety Equipment: Speakman, Watersaver, Encon, Guardian.
12. Water Coolers: Sunroc, Elkay, Filtrine, Oasis, Halsey Taylor.
13. Trap Insulation Kits: Truebro, TCI Products, Brocar Products.
14. Conditions: Furnish fixtures and trim by same manufacturer for each product specified
throughout.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Fixture Color: White, except as shown or specified otherwise.


B. Vitreous Ware: Best quality, non-absorbent ware. Warped or imperfect fixtures will not be
accepted.
C. Glazing on Metal: Thoroughly fused to body without discoloration, chips, flaws or craze. Glaze
all surfaces except those coming in contact with walls, floor or other fixtures.
D. Fixture Trim: Lead free (NSF-61) cast brass faucet bodies. Polished chrome finish on fixture
trim and exposed piping.
E. Fixture Traps: Wall type with integral cleanout plugs. Comply with specified plumbing code.
F. Accessories:
1. Furnish fixtures with specialties, trim and factory painted support brackets.
2. Caulking Compound:
a. General purpose sealing and caulking compound for setting plumbing fixtures and
bowls. Flexible, stretchable putty meeting Federal Specification TT-P-1536: Verify
compatibility with surfaces to be applied. Hercules Chemical Co. Sta-Put or equal.
b. Stain-free polymer sealing and caulking compound for setting plumbing fixtures and
bowls for porous or staining surfaces. Flexible, stretchable putty exceeding Federal
Specification TT-P-1536. Hercules Chemical Co. Sta-Put Ultra or equal.
2.3 WATER CLOSET (P-1)

A. Water Closet: Vitreous china, back outlet, top spud, wall hung. Sloan Wall Hung Closet
Combo Package WETS-2451.1201-1.1 Solis.
B. Seat: White, heavy duty, open front, less cover with EverClean, American Standard 5905.110,
Bemis 2155CT or Church 2155CT.
C. Flush Valve: Diaphragm operation, polished chrome plated brass, solar powered battery backup
operated sensor with override button actuator, 1.1 gpf. Sloan Solis combined with Water Closet.
D. Carrier: J.R. Smith Series 200 or 400.
2.4 WATER CLOSET (P-1A) ADA

A. Same as P-1, except mounted at ADA height.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 3
2.5 URINAL (P-2)

A. Urinal: Vitreous china, top spud, wall hung. Sloan Standard Washdown Urinal Combo Package
WEUS-1000.1201-0.125 Solis.
B. Flush Valve: Diaphragm operation, polished chrome plated brass, solar powered battery backup
operated sensor with override button actuator, 0.125 gpf. Sloan Solis combined with Urinal
Package.
C. Carrier: J.R. Smith 0617.
2.6 URINAL (P-2A) ADA

A. Urinal: Same as P-2 except mounted at ADA height.


2.7 LAVATORY (P-3)

A. Lavatory: Vitreous china, under counter sink, unglazed rim, 19 inch x 16 inch x 7 inch bowl.
American Standard Ovalyn 0496.221.
B. Faucet: Chrome plated brass, 4 inch centerset, battery operated sensor operated with 0.35 gpm
aerator on faucet. Sloan Optima Plus EBF-85.
C. Thermostatic mixing valve: Below deck thermostatic mixing valve, provide one per sensor
faucet, Sloan BDT option.
D. Supply: 1/2 inch IPS x 3/8 inch OD tube compression, angle pattern, brass stem, quarter turn
brass ball valve, chrome plated, with convertible loose key handle, flexible chrome plated copper
riser tube, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange, CSA certified to 200 psig. McGuire
LFBV170.
E. Drain: Open grid strainer 1-1/4 inch tailpiece, chrome plated brass body, tailpiece and locknut.
McGuire 155.
F. Trap: 1-1/4 x 1-1/2 inch, chrome plated, cast brass P-trap, with cleanout, 17 gauge seamless
tubular wall bend, cast brass slip nuts, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange, CSA certified.
McGuire 8902.
2.8 LAVATORY (P-3A)

A. Same as P-3 except add insulation kit. Truebro 102.


2.9 LAVATORY (P-3C)

A. Lavatory: Vitreous china, wall hung. American Standard, Lucerne 0355.012; Kohler Kingston
K-2005.
B. Faucet: Chrome plated brass, 4 inch centerset, battery operated sensor operated with 0.35 gpm
aerator on faucet. Sloan Optima Plus EBF-85.
C. Thermostatic mixing valve: Below deck thermostatic mixing valve, provide one per sensor
faucet, Sloan BDT option.
D. Supply: 1/2 inch IPS x 3/8 inch OD tube compression, angle pattern, brass stem, quarter turn
brass ball valve, chrome plated, with convertible loose key handle, flexible chrome plated copper
riser tube, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange, CSA certified to 200 psig. McGuire
LFBV170.
E. Drain: Open grid strainer, 1-1/4 inch tailpiece, chrome plated brass body, tailpiece and locknut.
McGuire 155A.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 4
F. Trap: 1-1/4 x 1-1/2 inch, chrome plated cast brass P-trap, without cleanout, 17 gauge seamless
tubular wall bend, cast brass slip nuts, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange, CSA certified.
McGuire 8902.
G. Carrier: J.R. Smith 700.
2.10 MOP RECEPTOR (P-4)

A. Basin: 32 x 32 inch x 12 inches high, molded terrazzo, with 6 inch drop front and stainless steel
caps on threshold, 3 inch stainless steel drain with strainer. Fiat model TSBC-1611.
B. Faucet: Rough chrome plated cast brass, ceramic cartridges, integral stops and check valves,
brass vacuum breaker, adjustable wall brace and pail hook, 4 arm handles with indicators, 3/4
inch hose thread spout. Speakman SC-5811-RCP.
C. Hose and Hose Bracket: Heavy duty 30 inch long, flexible cloth reinforced rubber hose with
chrome plated threaded connector at one end. Stainless steel hose bracket with rubber hose grip.
Fiat 832-AA.
D. Wall guard: Heavy 16 gauge type 430 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, two panel arrangement to
protect adjacent wall surface from water damage. Fiat MSG series.
2.11 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER (P-5) ADA

A. Electric Water Cooler: Wall mounted drinking fountain with fully recessed bottle filler, satin
finish 16 gauge type 304 stainless steel with soft touch push button activation on base, safety
guard bubbler, optional 6-inch stainless steel access panel below unit, for use with remote
chiller. Filtrine Mfg. Co. Model B103-107-16.
B. Trap: 1-1/4 x 1-1/2 inch, rough brass. McGuire 8090.
C. Supply: 1/2 x 3/8 inch, quarter turn ball valve straight stop. McGuire LBFV2-12.
2.12 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER REMOTE CHILLER (P-5A)

A. Remote Electric Chiller for Water Coolers: Factory packaged chiller/purifier, 18 gauge
enameled aluminum panels on 10 gauge frame, panels shall be removable without tools, HFC-
134a refrigerant, 5 micron spun polypropylene pre-filter, 5 micron carbon block purifier,
phosphate corrosion inhibitor, in-loop UV sterilier. Provide purity monitor with dial
thermometer, filter change light, UV intensity meter. Fan cooled condenser. Insulated tank and
water lines. Filtrine Mfg. Co. Model ES-25-RFC-A.
B. Capacity: Capable of serving up to 600 persons, 50 degrees F drinking water at 80 degrees F
inlet water and 90 degrees F room temperature. 25 gallon type 304 stainless steel tank.
C. Circulating pump: 4 gpm at 8 psi.
D. Electrical Requirements:
1. Compressor: 3/4 HP, 115V, 60 Hz, single phase A C.
2. Circulating pump: 1/3HP, 115V, 60 Hz, single phase A C.
2.13 SHOWER (P-6)

A. Shower Valve: Concealed anti-scald thermostatic/pressure balanced, polished chrome plated


brass wall plate with metal index and metal lever handle, brass 4 port valve body with dual
element cartridge, adjustable temperature limit stop, integral spring check stops. Meets ASSE
1016 to 1.5 gpm and +/-3 degree F. ASME A12.18.1. Speakman SM-5000 series.
B. Shower Head: Polished chrome plated, 1.5 GPM brass ball swivel joint, spray adjusting T-
handle. WaterSense certified to 1.5 gpm. Speakman S-2253-E15.
C. Shower Arm: Chrome plated brass 7 inch shower arm and wall flange. Speakman 2500.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 5
2.14 SHOWER (P-6A) ADA

A. Shower Valve: Concealed anti-scald thermostatic pressure balanced, polished chrome plated
brass wall plate with metal index and metal lever handle, brass 4 port valve body with dual
element cartridge, adjustable temperature limit stop, integral spring check stops. Includes
diverter valve. Meets ASSE 1016 to 1.5 gpm and +/-3 degree F. ASME A12.18.1. Speakman
SM-5400 series.
B. Hand Held Shower: Polished chrome finish, 2.0 GPM, fully adjustable. Speakman VS-2007-
E20.
C. Shower Head: Polished chrome plated, 1.5 GPM, brass ball swivel joint, spray adjusting T-
handle. WaterSense certified to 1.5 gpm. Speakman S-2253-E15.
D. Shower Arm: Polished chrome plated brass 7 inch shower arm and wall flange. Speakman
2500.
E. Supply Elbow: Chrome plated brass with flange. Speakman VS-115.
F. Hose: 69 inch Stainless Steel hose with rubber liner. Speakman VS-145.
G. Swivel Connector: Polished chrome. Speakman VS-120.
H. Slide Bar: 42 inch. Chrome plated brass. Speakman VS-124.
I. Vacuum Breaker: Chrome plated brass, inline. Speakman VS-117.
2.15 SINK (P-8)

A. Sink: Single compartment (11-1/2 x 16 x [7-1/2][6-1/2] [ ] inches) countertop type 304 18


gauge stainless steel, self rimming, [non-abrasive] sound deadened utilizing mechanical clamp
(lug type) fasteners. [ADA compliant] Just SL [ADA] 17519-A-GR.
B. Faucet: Deck mounted 8 inch centerset, polished chrome plated solid brass body, quarter turn
renewable compression cartridges, 9 inch swing spout, [lever][4 inch wrist blade] handles with
color coded plastic service indicators, [2.2 gpm], aerator. [ADA Compliant] [Chicago 201
[A245CP] [A317CP] [WaterSaver Faucet L2210 [BH]].
C. Supply: 1/2 inch IPS x 1/2 inch OD tube compression, angle pattern, brass stem, chrome
plated, flexible chrome plated copper riser tube, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange,
CSA certified to 200 psig, [loose key]. McGuire 2167 [LK].
D. Supply: 1/2 inch IPS x 1/2 inch OD tube compression, angle pattern, brass stem, quarter turn
brass ball valve, chrome plated, with convertible loose key handle, flexible chrome plated copper
riser tube, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange, CSA certified to 200 psig. McGuire
BV2167.
E. Drain: 304 stainless steel crumb cup strainer, nominal 4-inch diameter, with removable stainless
steel basket, 1-1/2 inch chrome plated brass tailpiece [with 1/2 inch branch connection for
dishwasher] and brass coupling nuts. Just J-35.
F. Trap: 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch chrome plated cast brass P-trap, with] [without] cleanout, 17 gauge
seamless tubular wall bend, cast brass slip nuts, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange, CSA
certified. McGuire 8912.
G. Insulation Kit: Truebro 102.
H. [Vacuum breaker for dishwasher: Deck mounted hot water anti-siphon vacuum breaker. Polished
chrome plated brass, silicone disc, 3/8 inch inlet and outlet; ANSI/ASSE 1001 & CSA B64.1.1.
Watts N388-C.]
I. [Tubing & fittings; 3/8 inch type L soft copper tubing ASTM B88. Fittings; Brass compression
fittings consisting of a complete assembly of body, nut and sleeve.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 6
2.16 KITCHEN SINKS/EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED UNDER SECTION 11 40 00.

A. Supply: 1/2 inch IPS x 1/2 inch OD tube compression, angle pattern, brass stem, quarter turn
brass ball valve, chrome plated, with convertible loose key handle, flexible chrome plated copper
riser tube, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange, CSA certified to 200 psig. McGuire
LFBV170.
B. Traps:
1. 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch, chrome plated cast brass P-trap, with cleanout, 17 gauge seamless
tubular wall bend, cast brass slip nuts, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange, CSA
certified. McGuire 8912.
2. 2 x 2 inch, chrome plated cast brass P-trap, with cleanout, 17 gauge seamless tubular wall
bend, cast brass slip nuts, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange, CSA certified. McGuire
8904.
C. Flexible Water Supply Hoses: Flexible polyurethane connector with brass quick disconnect and
[threaded] [2-way quick disconnect] end fittings, NSF certified, diameter and length as required
by equipment.. Dormont Manufacturing Swirl Hose Assembly.
2.17 LABORATORY SINKS/EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED UNDER SECTION 12 35 53.

A. Supply: 1/2 inch IPS x 1/2 inch OD tube compression, angle pattern, brass stem, quarter turn
brass ball valve, chrome plated, with convertible loose key handle, flexible chrome plated copper
riser tube, shallow chrome plated brass wall flange (for vivariums or high containment areas see
Part 3, CSA certified to 200 psig. McGuire LFBV170.
B. Traps: Mechanical Joint:
1. 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch, flame retardant polypropylene P-trap. Enfield W 1021; Sloan 9211E.
2. 2 x 2 inch, flame retardant polypropylene P-trap. Enfield W 1022; Sloan 527212E.
C. Flexible Hoses for laboratory gas supplies to overhead service panels: Three foot long hose
assemblies consisting of hose with an inner core of natural polyvinyl chloride (PVC), a
nylon braided reinforcement layer and a PVC outer layer. Hose is rated to 1000 PSI burst
pressure, 300 PSI maximum working pressure. Outer layer of hose is color coded to match
the color coding of the keyed quick connect to which it is connected. NTP female threaded
end fittings are permanently attached to the hose with a barb fitting and crimped ferrule.
The end connections swivel to prevent kinking or twisting of the hose. WaterSaver Faucet
Co. HPV series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Rough-in and assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to
manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture
rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
C. Install fixtures plumb and level.
D. Provide piping connections to fixtures with valves and escutcheons as specified in Section 22 05
05.
E. Provide through bolts and 1/4 inch thick steel backing plates for securing wall hangers for wall-
hung fixtures not furnished with chair carriers. Provide additional blocking in walls for fixture
and faucet brackets, include all required hardware or inserts.
F. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 7
G. Provide chrome plated supplies to fixtures with wheel handle stops, reducers and escutcheons.
H. Install chrome plated parts using methods and tools which will not damage finished surfaces.
I. Rigidly secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space.
J. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities
to reach.
K. Emergency Shower: Shower head, pull, and piping shall be capable of supporting 200 pound
weight. Install key lock valve as shown. Attach lock key to valve with tie wire.
L. Verify that plumbing fixtures and trim are tight, leak-free and function properly.
M. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding”. Connect wiring
according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables”.
N. Install flexible hoses for kitchen or laboratory equipment where indicated on drawings.
Coordinate hose lengths to provide some movement at equipment but avoid excessive lengths of
hose. Neatly coil excess hose and use nylon tie or other means to secure hose in neat
appearance.
3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. Replace washers
and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. Verify metering faucets remain open for a
minimum of 10 seconds.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
C. Assure eyewashes and safety showers meet ANSI performance criteria. If supplied with
tempered water verify temperature reached at fixtures and adjust if necessary. Install testing
record tags on safety equipment for owner to record weekly testing in compliance with ANSI
Z358.1.
D. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
E. Adjust water temperature at sensor operated automatic blending faucets to 95 deg. F unless
otherwise required by local authorities or regulations. User operated adjustable temperature
features shall be locked-out after water temperature is adjusted.
F. Verify operation of correct solenoid valve on disposer for low flow or high flow of water, ensure
valves are wired to correct terminals of control panel.
3.3 SPECIAL PROTECTION

A. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction workers unless approved in writing by the Owner.
B. Leave factory packaging in place until final cleaning.
3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and
spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 8
3.5 FIXTURE HEIGHTS

A. Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated, unless specifically noted on
Plumbing or Architectural drawings.
B. Water Closet:
1. Standard: 15 inches to top of bowl rim.
2. ADA: 17 inches minimum to 19 inches maximum to top of seat.
C. Urinal:
1. Standard: 22 inches to top of bowl rim.
2. ADA: 17 inches maximum to top of bowl rim and maximum 44 inches to flush controls.
D. Lavatory:
1. Standard: 31 inches to top of basin rim.
2. ADA: 34 inches maximum to top of basin rim.
E. Drinking Fountain:
1. Standard: 40 inches to top of basin rim. Minimum 38 inches to maximum 43 inches to
spout outlet.
2. ADA: 36 inches maximum to spout outlet.
F. Shower:
1. Head: 74 inches to bottom of head.
2. Control Valve:
a. Standard: 54 inches to centerline of valve.
b. ADA: 44 inches to centerline of valve.
3. Hand Held Shower Slide Bar: 70 inches to top mounting point.
4. Transfer Valve for hand held shower: 44 inches to centerline of valve.
5. For square transfer type shower compartment shower controls shall be mounted within a
maximum of 15 inches from the control wall centerline toward the shower opening. For roll-
in shower compartments the controls shall be mounted on any wall of the shower if there is
no seat. With a seat the controls shall be mounted on the back wall adjacent to the seat wall
at a maximum of 27 inches from the seat wall.
G. Emergency Eye and Face Wash: 38 inches maximum to receptor rim.
H. Emergency Shower: 84 to 96 inches to bottom of head.
I. Wall Mounted Sinks: 34 inches maximum to top of basin rim.
J. Mop Receptor:
1. Faucet: 36 inches above finished floor or centered in block face to faucet inlet centerline.
2. Hose Holder Bracket: 24 inches above finished floor and located to front of receptor for
easy access.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 9
SECTION 22 63 16
LABORATORY GAS EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. High pressure Compressed air system equipment.


B. Laboratory vacuum system equipment.
C. Gas manifolds.
D. Emergency laboratory gases shut-off equipment.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 22 10 05 - Building Services and Process Piping Systems, for designation of piping
schedules for these systems.
B. Section 22 10 06 - Building Services and Process Piping Schedules, for piping materials, joints,
fittings, valves and testing/cleaning.
C. Section 22 05 48 - Plumbing Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control, for vibration pads.
D. Section 22 10 19 - Piping Specialties, for pressure reducing valves for compressed air and gases.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Follow Section 01 33 00.


B. Shop Drawings:
1. Complete dimensioned layout showing piping, equipment, components and accessories.
2. Include control panel layout (front view) and wiring diagrams.
C. Product Data:
1. Indicate equipment schedule number, pump type, capacity and power requirements.
2. Describe details and data related to materials of construction, outline dimensions, piping and
wiring diagrams, receiver size, total weight, and description of all included accessories.
3. Show estimated performance, including discharge pressure, capacity, cfm at inlet
conditions, motor hp and brake hp at full and zero capacity, rpm and sound power levels.
D. Informational Submittals:
1. Certificates:
a. Certify that field tests have been performed and that work meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
b. Submit ASME Inspection Certificate and Code Stamp by Regulatory Agency for air
compressor and vacuum pump receivers.
2. Field Service Reports.
3. Demonstration and Instruction Statement from Owner.
4. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include data for pressure reducing valves, filters, vacuum
equipment and gas manifolds.
5. Special Warranty: Warrant vacuum pumps, including motors and accessories for 2 years
from date of Substantial Completion.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL

A. Follow Section 01 77 01.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
LABORATORY GAS EQUIPMENT
22 63 16 - 1
B. Provide one (1) additional filter element for each compressor intake filter, compressor water RO
membrane cartridge, compressor water carbon pre-filter, desiccant dryer particulate, coalescing
and final filter elements.
1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Compressed air system: The air-end shall be provided with an extended 5 year warranty. The
standard warranty of 24 months from the date of initial use or 27 months from the date of
shipment, shall apply the other major components.
B. Vacuum Systems: The vacuum pumps shall be provided with an extended 5 year warranty. The
standard warranty of 24 months from the date of initial use or 27 months from the date of
shipment, shall apply the other major components.
C. Gas Manifolds.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Equipment shall be factory fabricated, wired, piped, assembled, packaged, tested and skid
mounted. Packages assembled by other than pump manufacturer are not approved.
B. Manufacturer shall supply all equipment listed in applicable sections.
C. Noise level for 8 hour weighted average must not exceed 85 dBA at equipment.
2.2 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturers: Substitutions are permitted subject to Section 00 26 00.


1. Pressure Reducing Valves:
a. Norgren Co.
b. Watts FluidAir.
c. Ingersoll-Rand, ARO, Fluid Products Division.
2. Air Filters:
a. Gardener Denver.
b. Hankinson Corporation.
c. Ingersoll-Rand, ARO, Fluid Products Division.
d. Watts FluidAir Van Air Systems, F200 Series.
B. Air Filters: In-line, 1 micron cartridge-type particulate filter with a drain. Heavy duty cast
aluminum housing and bowl with interior and exterior epoxy powder coating, 250 psig pressure
rating, differential pressure indicator to identify element change, automatic drain. Filter element
consisting of a stainless steel support core and high performance filter media. Locate air filters as
shown on drawings.
C. Constant Pressure Reducing Valves: Size to maintain a constant downstream pressure of 125
psi.
2.3 HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM (OPTION 1) (DELETED)

2.4 HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSED AIR BOOSTER (OPTION 2) (DELETED)

2.5 LABORATORY VACUUM SYSTEM

A. Design Standard Manufacturer: Sherman Engineering. (Edwards, Ltd.). Substitutions subject to


Section 00 26 00 are:
1. Nash Gardener Denver, DryPro VSA series.
2. Busch Inc., Cobra Industry series.
3. Other substitutions are not permitted.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
LABORATORY GAS EQUIPMENT
22 63 16 - 2
B. Vacuum Pumps: Triplex rotary, dry screw vacuum pumps, chilled water cooled, two pumps
operating one pump standby: Capacity as shown.
C. Pump Components: Including but not limited to:
1. Enhanced screw-type rotor with double ended shaft support.
2. Single piece cast iron body Water cooled with automatic closed loop thermal management
system.
3. Flexible coupling with guard Medium duty purge module which facilitates shaft seal, inlet
and gas ballast purge using nitrogen gas.
4. Nitrogen gas pressure gauge, regulator and shut-off valve.
5. Solvent flush option.
6. Premium efficiency inverter duty motors for variable speed drive of each pump.
7. Vacuum switches.
8. Flow switches.
9. Automatic inlet isolation valves.
10. Acoustical enclosure with industrial grade paint.
11. Skid feet with floor mounting hole for each pump.
12. Elastomeric vibration isolation pads for each pump foot.
D. Receiver Components: Including but not limited to:
1. Vertical type, welded carbon steel, epoxy coated after fabrication, rated for full vacuum and
150 psi working pressure, ASME Code stamped.
2. Safety relief valve.
3. Sight glass.
4. Blowdown valve.
5. Normally closed 3 valve bypass piping arrangement.
E. System Components: Including but not limited, to:
1. Water trap silencer Common system vacuum filter with carbon steel housing and 2 micron
paper filter element rated for 99% efficiency.
2. Water solenoid valves.
3. Shock arrestors.
4. Flow control valves.
5. Water strainers.
6. Vacuum switches.
7. Flow switches.
8. Automatic inlet isolation valves.
9. Vacuum gauge.
10. Flexible connectors.
11. Elastomeric vibration isolation pads for each pump.
12. Factory prime and paint entire system with industrial grade enamel paint.
F. Integrated on-board control module Control Panel components: Including but not limited to:
1. Intelligent control system for each pump to adjust performance based upon demand, protect
pump from system upsets or malfunctions, high operating temperature, loss of cooling
liquid, high discharge pack pressure or ingestion of liquid carryover from piping system.
2. Integral inverter motor drive for each pump.
3. Frequency independent automated local or remote start/stop.
4. Process pressure control function.
5. Active utility control (power saving) mode.
6. External PID pad for remote operation control.
7. Gateway (MicroTIM controller) for remote monitoring of pump status Start/Stop and alarm
output.
G. For Module M vacuum system only: Provide integrated EH2600 booster module for each pump.
Include hydrokinetic drive fluid coupling, ISO160 inlet connection, vented gearbox with purge
line accessory.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
LABORATORY GAS EQUIPMENT
22 63 16 - 3
H. System Sequencer/Controller: The system shall include a common sequencing controller to
provide timed alternation of the vacuum pumps, lead / lag operation and auto restart capabilities
in the event of a power failure.
I. Sequence of Operation for M Building System:
1. Operate lead pump on a fall in system vacuum pressure below 10 torr; cycle off upon
attaining 5 torr. If lead vacuum pump does not start or cannot maintain a vacuum of 10 torr
on the system, the second pump shall automatically start and both pumps shall operate
simultaneously until 10 torr vacuum is achieved. If vacuum system falls to 15 torr vacuum,
the third pump shall start. Electric alternator circuit shall automatically alternate operation
of each vacuum pump after each pump shuts down. Sequence of alternation shall be 1-2-3,
2-3-1 and 3-1-2. Operate next pump in sequence upon failure of lead pump and alarm.
J. Sequence of Operation for N Building System:
1. Operate lead pump on a fall in system vacuum pressure below 24 inches Hg.; cycle off upon
attaining 26 inches Hg. If lead vacuum pump does not start or cannot maintain a vacuum of
23 inches Hg on the system, the second pump shall automatically start and both pumps shall
operate simultaneously until 26 inches Hg vacuum is achieved. If vacuum system falls to
22 inches Hg vacuum, the third pump shall start. Electric alternator circuit shall
automatically alternate operation of each vacuum pump after each pump shuts down.
Sequence of alternation shall be 1-2-3, 2-3-1 and 3-1-2. Operate next pump in sequence
upon failure of lead pump and alarm.
2.6 MANIFOLDS FOR ARGON AND HYDROGEN GAS

A. Manifold:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are permitted subject to Section 00 26 00.
a. Beacon Medaes; PDC3000S Series.
b. Matheson Gas Products; SwitchPro 524 Series.
c. Western Enterprises; Model CS3000.
2. Provide automatic manifolds consisting of wall mounted control cabinets, cross-type
headers, connections and pigtails for the following gases:
a. Argon: See Drawings for number of cylinders, half in service and half in reserve.
b. Hydrogen: See Drawings for number of cylinders, half in service and half in
reserve.
3. Manifolds shall deliver gases at 50 psi plus/minus 5 psi. Changeover from primary to
secondary supply shall take place automatically.
4. Provide optional block valves before regulators to isolate regulators or to switch over
without interrupting supply or gas. Provide optional vent valve shall be installed and piped
to vent to allow adjustment of pressure reducing regulators and pressure switches.
5. All external header and pigtail connections shall be keyed to each specific medical gas per
CGA Specifications to prevent cross connection.
6. Primary and secondary bank headers shall include a high pressure oxygen rated shutoff
valve.
7. Provide gauges to indicate each bank and line pressures.
8. Provide relief valves before and after line regulator.
9. All piping and components of manifold in contact with gas shall be stainless steel.
10. See Drawings for number of manifolds to be provided.
B. Alarm System.
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are permitted subject to Section 00 26 00.
a. Beacon Medaes; included with manifold.
b. Matheson Gas Products; Model PM-24.
c. Western Enterprises; Model BIA-3 and WMS-9-25C.
2. Remote Alarm Panel: Surface mounting panel consisting of but not limited to:
a. Green light for service bank in use.
b. Red light for reserve bank in use.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
LABORATORY GAS EQUIPMENT
22 63 16 - 4
c. Audible warning device with silence button.
d. Plug-in power supply.
e. Provide one alarm panel for manifold.
2.7 NITROGEN GAS FILTERS

A. Manufacturers: Substitutions are permitted subject to Section 00 26 00.


1. Filters:
a. Gardener Denver.
b. Hankinson Corporation.
c. Ingersoll-Rand, ARO, Fluid Products Division.
d. Van Air Systems, F200 Series.
B. Filters: In-line, 1 micron cartridge-type particulate filter with manual ball valve drain. Heavy
duty cast aluminum housing and bowl with interior and exterior epoxy powder coating, 250 psig
pressure rating, differential pressure indicator to identify element change, automatic drain. Filter
element consisting of a stainless steel support core and high performance filter media. Locate air
filters as shown on drawings.
2.8 EMERGENCY LABORATORY GASES SHUT-OFF EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturers: ASCO. Substitutions are permitted subject to Section 00 26 00.


B. Solenoid Valves: Brass body, normally closed, epoxy encapsulated solenoid, operating air or
inert gas pressure 5 to 125 psig, 120VAC; ASCO Model 8210G20/AC.
C. AC Relay Panels: Recessed mounted 14 gauge steel cabinet, NEMA 1, with key-operated switch
with manual “on” and “off” buttons directly on cover. 120V/60Hz input and output to AC
powered valves. Operating key-switch to on position powers solenoid valves open to start gas
supply. Loss of power or any emergency stop or off switch on relay control panel deactivates
power closing valves and stopping gas flow. Key-switch must be used to open valves to restart
gas flow. Panel dimensions 9-inch wide by 10-inch high by 3-3/4-inch deep. ASCO Model
108D90C.
D. Control Stations: Mushroom style red plastic emergency shut off push button that will de-
activate solenoid valve. Provide with recessed 4-inch square junction box and wall trim plate.
ASCO Model 173A19.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Follow Section 01 45 00 for Quality Control of installation.


B. Mount vacuum pump units on individual concrete pads. Follow Section 22 05 05 for
coordination.
C. Install vacuum pump receiver so that liquids from system will not enter tank, but instead will
pass directly through pump to waste.
D. Install vacuum pump skids on Type SPNRE vibration isolation pads inertia base. Follow Section
22 05 48.
E. Install solenoid valves for laboratory gases and compressed air for each control area as indicated
on drawings. Wire solenoids to relay panel along with control station(s) and coordinate
monitoring point with BAS system. Locate relay panel at exit from control area and control
stations at least at one other exit.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
LABORATORY GAS EQUIPMENT
22 63 16 - 5
3.2 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. As specified in Section 22 05 05.


3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Follow Section 01 45 00.


B. Provide field services for air compressors and vacuum pumps.
C. Provide factory authorized person from vacuum pump manufacturer to witness testing of
concentration vacuum piping system for Module M due to deep vacuum level required.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Follow Section 01 79 00.


B. Provide 8 hours each for start-up demonstration, and instruction on operation and maintenance
of air compressors and vacuum pumps.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
LABORATORY GAS EQUIPMENT
22 63 16 - 6
SECTION 23 20 10
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping, valves, specialties and accessories.
B. Glycol solution.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Install thermometers, gauges, indicators and test plugs furnished under Section 23 05 19.
B. Install flow, temperature and pressure transmitters furnished under Section 23 05 15.
C. Install water coupon rack and bypass (pot) feeder furnished under Section 23 25 10.
D. Install control valves, flow switches, temperature sensor wells, flow indicators, meters and gauge
taps furnished under Section 25 10 00.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 31 11 - Suspended Loading - Coordination and Limitations for coordination and
limitations of suspended loading.
B. Section 23 05 05 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, for pipe and valve manufacturers,
installation requirements.
C. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports, for supports, anchors and guides.
D. Section 23 05 48 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Augment ductwork shop drawings with piping systems in mechanical equipment areas and
where steam and condensate piping is routed.
2. Piping Exterior to Building: Show plans and sections of aboveground piping systems.
Detail structural support system. Include sizes, weights, dimensions, materials, connection
methods, and pertinent information required for review.
C. Product Data: For valves, specialties and expansion joints, identify each product; size, material,
capacity and location of use.
D. Informational Submittals:
1. Certifications:
a. Certify that field tests have been performed and that work meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
b. Inspection certificates for pressure vessels from Authority having jurisdiction.
2. Test results (strength) of glycol and water solution.
3. Demonstration and Instruction Statement from Owner.
4. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include assembly views, lubrication instructions and
replacement parts list.
5. Special Warranty: See Steam System Expansion Joints.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: COMPLY WITH:
A. ANSI/ASME B31.1, B31.5 and B31.9.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 1
B. ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. ANSI/ASME Section 9. Welding Materials and Procedures.
D. Welders: Certified in accordance with ANSI/ASME Section IX and ANSI/AWS D1.1.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Follow Section 01 65 00.
B. Store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
C. Protect flange faces from damage with wood, plastic or soft metal.
D. Protect pipe threads from damage with plastic caps.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Follow Section 01 77 01.
B. One extra 45 gallon drum of propylene glycol solution.
C. Two service kits for each size and type of steam trap.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES, VALVES AND FITTINGS FOR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR ABOVE GROUND
SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: See Pipe, Valves and Accessories in Section 23 05 05.
B. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Pipe: Seamless copper tubing, Type ACR, hard drawn; ASTM B280.
2. Joints: Brazed with nitrogen purge.
3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint pressure fittings; ANSI B16.22.
4. Joint Materials: Brazing alloy, 15% silver content; ASME SFA 5.8 Class BcuP-5.
5. Shut-Off Valves: Diaphragm type, forged brass body and bonnet, positive backseating
when fully open, raised seat with nylon seat disc, stainless steel spring, flared or soldered
connections, UL listed. Henry Valve Company Golden Bantam.
6. Check Valves: Forged brass body, Teflon seat, guided piston, stainless steel spring,
accessible internal parts, operable in all positions. Rated for 300 degrees F and 500 psi.
Henry Valve Company Type 1160.
C. Chilled Water, Low Temperature Chilled Water/Glycol, Hot Water, Glycol Hot Water, Cold
Water Make-Up, Condenser Water, Refrigerant Equipment Pressure Relief, and Pumped
Cooling Condensate Recovery piping:
1. Pipe:
a. 2 Inch and Smaller: Type L hard drawn, seamless copper; ASTM B88.
b. 2-1/2 to 10 Inch: Schedule 40, welded or seamless steel, black; ASTM A53 or A106,
Grade B.
c. 12 to 24 Inch: Standard weight (0.375 inch thick wall), welded or seamless steel, black;
ASTM A53 or A106, Grade B.
d. 26 to 48 Inch: 0.500 inch wall thickness, seamless steel, black; ASTM A106, Grade B.
2. Joints:
a. 3/4 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Viega ProPress or approved equivalent.
b. 2 Inch: Soldered.
c. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Butt-welded.
3. Joint Material:
a. 2 Inch and Smaller: Grade Sb5 solder; ASTM B32.
b. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Welded; ANSI/AWS D1.1.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 2
4. Fittings:
a. 3/4 Inch to 1-1/2 Inch: Wrought copper, Viega ProPress or approved equivalent
b. 2 Inch: Wrought copper, soldered; ANSI B16.22.
c. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Steel, in wall thickness specified for pipe, butt-welded, flanged
at valve and equipment connections, long radius elbows; ASTM A234, ANSI B16.9.
5. Unions:
a. 3/4 Inch to 1-1/2 Inch: Wrought copper, Viega ProPress or approved equivalent
b. 2 Inch: Bronze, soldered joint.
c. 2-1/2 and 3 Inch: Malleable-Iron, ground joint, threaded.
6. Flanges:
a. 2 Inch and Smaller: Cast bronze, companion type, 150 psi; ANSI B16.24.
b. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Raised-face, welding neck, forged steel, 150 psi (flat faced
when matched to 125 psi flanges); ASTM A181, ANSI B16.5
7. Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel hexhead studs with heavy hex nuts; ASTM A307 Grade B,
ASTM A194 Grade 2H.
8. Gaskets: Non-asbestos material, thickness, pressure and temperature to suit system (ring
type for raised face; full face for flat faced), Flexitallic.
9. Dielectric Fittings: Isolation flanges, unions and couplings, Epco Sales, Inc.
10. Shut-Off Valves:
a. 2 Inch and Smaller: 400 psi two-piece, bronze body ball valve, soldered joint, Grinnell
Figure 3500SJ. Provide valve stem extensions for valves in insulated systems.
b. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: 250psi (to 20”), bi-directional dead end rated with zero leakage,
ductile iron or cast iron lug type body, quarter turn butterfly valve, bronze aluminum or
Nylon 11 disc, stainless steel stem, EPDM seat, minimum ten-position lever lock
handle, gear operated above 6 inch size, gear operated with chain-wheel where
specified, Grinnell LD-8281.2.7.-4, or Bray Series 31H-119.
11. Globe Valves:
a. 2 Inch and Smaller: 200 psi bronze, renewable disc, rising stem, union bonnet, soldered
joint, Grinnell Figure 3240SJ.
b. 2-1/2 to 10 Inch: 200 psi flanged iron body, bronze disc, bronze mounted, yoke top,
bolted bonnet, Nibco Figure F718B.
12. Check Valves:
a. 2 Inch and Smaller: 300 psi bronze, renewable disc, threaded bonnet, soldered joints,
swing type, Grinnell Figure 3300SJ.
b. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: 150 psi flanged iron body, bronze renewable seat and disc,
globe style silent check, Grinnell Figures 502 1/2 to 530.
D. Pumped Steam Condensate:
1. Pipe: Schedule 80, welded or seamless steel, black; ASTM A53 or A106, Grade B.
2. Joints:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Threaded.
b. 2 Inch and Larger: Butt-welded.
3. Fittings:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Malleable iron, threaded, 150 psi.
b. 2 Inch and Larger: Extra strong steel, butt-welded, flanged at valve and equipment
connections, long radius elbows; ASTM A234.
4. Unions (1-1/2 Inch and Smaller): Forged steel, bronze to iron ground joint, threaded, 3000
psi; ASTM A105.
5. Flanges: Forged steel, threaded or weldneck, raised face 150 psi (flat faced when matched
to 125 psi flanges); ASTM A181 or A105, Grade 1, ANSI B16.5.
6. Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel hex-head studs with heavy hex nuts; ASTM A307 Grade B,
ASTM A194 Grade 2H.
7. Gaskets: Non-asbestos material, thickness, pressure and temperature to suit system (ring
type for raised face; full face for flat faced), Flexitallic.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 3
8. Shut-Off Valves:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 150 psi bronze gate, threaded, solid wedge, rising stem, union
bonnet, Nibco Figure T134 with TFE Packing.
b. 2 to 24 Inch: 150 psi flanged cast steel body gate, solid or flexible wedge, OS&Y,
bolted bonnet, universal trim, Crane Figure 47XU.
9. Globe Valves:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 150 psi bronze, renewable disc, rising stem, union bonnet,
threaded ends, Nibco Figure T-235.
b. 2 to 8 Inch: 150 psi flanged cast steel body, floating stem disc, OS&Y, bolted bonnet,
rising stem, universal trim, Crane Figure 143XU.
10. Check Valves:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 150 psi bronze body, renewable seat and disc, threaded ends,
spring loaded lift type, Nibco Figure T-480.
b. 2 to 12 Inch: 125 psi flanged iron body, bronze mounted, renewable seat and disc,
spring loaded, globe style silent type, Nibco Figure F910.
c. 2 to 16 Inch: 150 psi flanged cast steel body, stainless steel seats and disc, spring
loaded, globe style silent type, Muessco Figure 105M-DT.
E. Cooling Condensate Recovery:
1. Pipe: Hard drawn seamless copper tubing, Type L; ASTM B88.
2. Joints: Soldered, Solder Grade Sb5; ASTM B32.
3. Fittings: Wrought copper, soldered ends; ANSI B16.29.
F. Low Pressure Steam (Less Than 50 psig) and Associated Condensate System:
1. Pipe:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Schedule 80, welded or seamless steel, black; ASTM A53 or
A106, Grade B.
b. 2 to 10 Inch: Schedule 40 for steam, and schedule 80 for condensate, welded or
seamless steel, black; ASTM A53 or A106, Grade B.
c. 12 to 24 Inch: Standard weight (0.375 inch thick wall) for steam and XS for
condensate, welded or seamless steel, black; ASTM A53 or A106, Grade B.
d. At pressure reducing stations, substitute extra strong (XS) weight class piping.
2. Joints:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Threaded.
b. 2 Inch and Larger: Welded.
3. Fittings:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Forged steel, threaded, 3000 psi; ASTM A105, ANSI B16.11.
b. 2 Inch and Larger: Steel, in wall thickness specified for pipe, butt-welded, flanged at
valve and equipment connections, long radius elbows; ASTM A234, ANSI B16.9.
4. Unions (1-1/2 Inch and Smaller): Forged steel, bronze to iron ground joint, threaded, 3000
PSI; ASTM A105.
5. Flanges: ASTM A181 or A105, Grade 1, ANSI B16.5; forged steel; threaded or weldneck,
raised face for 150 psi (flat faced when matched to 125 psi flanges); provide weldneck bore
300 psi flanges to match mate components, valves and equipment with 300 psi flanges.
6. Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel hexhead studs with heavy hex nuts; ASTM A307 Grade B,
ASTM A194 Grade 2H.
7. Gaskets: Non-asbestos material, thickness, pressure and temperature to suit system (ring
type for raised face; full face for flat faced), Flexitallic. Style CG ANSI#150 Bolt Pattern
Ring Gasket, Stainless Steel, Spiral Wound Windings Type 304L with Flexible Graphite
“Flexicarb” Fill ANSI Class#150 in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.5 Carbon Steel
Outer Ring.
8. Shut-Off Valves:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 150 psi bronze gate, threaded ends, solid wedge, rising stem,
union bonnet, Nibco Figure T134 with TFE Packing.
b. 2 to 4 Inch: 125 psi flanged iron body gate, solid wedge, bronze mounted, OS&Y,
bolted bonnet, Nibco Figure F6170.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 4
c. 5 Inch and Larger: 150 psi flanged cast steel body gate, solid or flexible wedge,
OS&Y, bolted bonnet, universal trim, bossed for bypass, Crane Figure 47XU.
9. Globe Valves:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 150 psi bronze, renewable disc, bronze mounted yoke top,
union bonnet, rising stem, Grinnell Figure 3240.
b. 2 to 4 Inch: 125 psi flanged iron body, bronze mounted, renewable seat and disc,
bolted bonnet, swing type, Nibco Figure F918B.
c. 5 to 8 Inch: 150 psi flanged cast steel body, floating stem disc, OS&Y, bolted bonnet,
universal trim, rising stem, Crane Figure 143XU.
10. Check Valves:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 125 psi bronze, renewable disc, threaded bonnet, threaded
ends, swing type, Grinnell Figure 3300.
b. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 150 psi bronze, renewable disc, threaded bonnet, threaded
ends, swing type, Nibco Figure T-433.
c. 2 to 16 Inch: 150 psi flanged cast steel body, bolted bonnet, universal trim, swing type,
Crane Figure 147XU.
G. Medium and High Pressure (50 psi and above) Steam and Associated Condensate System:
1. Pipe:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Schedule 80, seamless steel, black; ASTM A53 or A106,
Grade B.
b. 2 to 10 Inch: Schedule 40, welded or seamless steel, black; ASTM A53 or A106,
Grade B.
c. 12 to 24 Inch: Standard weight (0.375 inch thick wall), welded or seamless steel, black;
ASTM A53 or A106, Grade B.
d. At pressure reducing stations, substitute extra strong (XS) weight class piping.
2. Joints:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Welded (Socket welds are permitted).
b. 2 Inch and Larger: Welded.
3. Fittings:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Forged steel, threaded, 3000 psi; ASTM A105, ANSI B16.11
or standard weight steel, welded, long radius elbow; ASTM A234, ANSI B16.9.
b. 2 Inch and Larger: Steel, in wall thickness as specified for pipe, butt-welded, beveled
end, long radius elbow; ASTM A234, ANSI B16.9.
4. Unions (1-1/2 Inch and Smaller): Forged steel, socket weld or threaded, steel to steel seat,
ground joint, 3000 psi; ASTM A105, ANSI B16.11.
5. Flanges: Forged steel, weldneck bore to match pipe, 150 or 300 psi flanges. Flanges to
match mating component, valves and equipment Class flanges required; ASTM A181 or
A105, Grade 1, ANSI B16.5.
6. Bolts and Nuts: Alloy steel bolt studs threaded full length, ANSI Class 2A threads with
heavy hex nuts; ASTM A193 Grade B7, ASTM A194 Class 2H ANSI B18.2.2.
7. Gaskets: Non-asbestos material, thickness, pressure and temperature to suit system,
Flexitallic. Style CG ANSI#150 Bolt Pattern Ring Gasket, Stainless Steel, Spiral Wound
Windings Type 304L with Flexible Graphite “Flexicarb” Fill ANSI Class#150 in
accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.5 Carbon Steel Outer Ring.
8. Shut-Off Valves:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 300 psi bronze gate, threaded ends, solid wedge, rising stem,
union bonnet, Crane Figure 634E.
b. 2 Inch and Larger: 150 psi flanged cast steel body gate, solid wedge, OS&Y, bolted
bonnet, universal trim, bossed for bypass, Crane Figure 47XU.
9. Globe Valves:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 300 psi bronze, renewable disc and seat, threaded ends, union
bonnet, rising stem, Nibco Figure T276AP.
b. 2 to 12 Inch Within CUP: 300 psi flanged cast steel body, OS&Y, bolted bonnet, rising
stem, Crane Figure 151X.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 5
c. 2 to 14 Inch Outside CUP: 150 psi flanged cast steel body, OS&Y, bolted bonnet,
rising stem, Crane Figure 143X.
10. Check Valves:
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 300 psi bronze, renewable disc, threaded bonnet and ends,
swing type, Nibco Figure T473.
b. 2 to 24 Inch Within CUP: 300 psi flanged cast steel body, renewable seat and disc,
bolted bonnet, swing type, Crane Figure 159X.
c. 2 to 24 Inch Outside CUP: 150 psi flanged cast steel body, bolted bonnet, swing type,
Crane Figure 147X.
H. Steam Vents: As specified for steam piping.
2.2 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. General: Install all piping, valves and fittings per equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
1. Alco.
2. Flo-Con.
3. Henry Valve Co.
4. Sporlan.
C. Liquid Indicators:
1. Double port type with copper or brass body, and flared or soldered ends.
2. Provide removable seal caps on each port for inspection of refrigerant conditions.
3. Provide full size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser. If receiver is used,
install in liquid line leaving receiver.
D. Strainers:
1. Angle type with brass shell and replaceable cartridge.
2. Suitable for refrigerant and piping material used in the system.
3. Provide full size strainer ahead of each automatic valve. Where multiple expansion valves
with integral strainers are used install single main liquid line strainer.
4. Provide shut-off valve on each side of strainer to facilitate maintenance.
E. Refrigerant Driers:
1. In-line or angle type with copper or brass shell.
2. Use replaceable desiccant drying material.
3. Provide full flow permanent refrigerant drier in low temperature systems and systems
utilizing hermetic compressors.
4. Provide three-valve bypass assembly.
F. Filter-Driers:
1. Angle type, with brass shell and using combined straining and drying material.
2. Use replaceable desiccant material.
3. Acceptable in lieu of separate strainers and driers.
4. Provide three-valve bypass assembly.
G. Solenoid Valves:
1. Copper or brass body with flared or threaded ends.
2. Use replaceable coil assembly.
3. Provide a manually operated stem to permit operation in case of coil failure.
4. Provide solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-
down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil
bleeder lines from flooded evaporators, to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line
when system shuts down.
H. Expansion Valves:
1. Angle type or straight through design suitable for refrigerant used.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 6
2. Brass body, internal or external equalizer, and adjustable superheat setting, complete with
capillary tube and remote sensing bulb.
3. Size expansion valves to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at
partial load.
4. Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop
across each valve.
5. Select valves for maximum load at design operating pressure [and minimum 43 degrees F of
superheat].
I. Charging Valves:
1. General purpose type with brass body, flared or solder ends and removable valve core.
2. Provide valve inlet with quick coupling connection for ease of charging.
3. Provide refrigerant charging connections in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and
expansion valve.
J. Flexible Connectors:
1. Close pitch corrugated bronze hose with single layer of exterior braiding, at least 9 inches
long with bronze fittings.
2. Use only at or near compressors where it is not physically possible to absorb vibration
within piping configuration.
2.3 WATER SYSTEM VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
1. Bladder Type Expansion Tanks:
2. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Amtrol.
b. Bell & Gossett.
c. Taco.
3. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of
ANSI/ASME Code; rated for minimum working pressure of 125 psi and 240 degrees F, with
flexible replaceable heavy butyl rubber bladder in tank for separation of air charge of tank
and the expanded fluid; and steel legs or saddles for horizontal units where scheduled.
4. Accessories: Pressure gauge and air-charging fitting, tank drain, in-line air purger,
automatic fill valve, pre-charge to pressure indicated on Drawings.
B. Pressure Reducing Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Bell & Gossett.
b. McDonnell & Miller.
c. Watts.
2. Diaphragm: Non-corrosive material. Operated with integral anti-syphon check valve and
inlet strainer. Removable valve seat, strainer and stem. Strainer shall be removable without
system shutdown.
C. Air Vents and Drain Valves:
1. Vents:
a. Manufacturers, Automatic Types: Substitutions are not permitted.
1) Amtrol.
2) Bell & Gossett.
3) Taco.
b. Type 1 (Manual): Short vertical section of 1 inch pipe to form an air chamber at
accessible piping system high points with 1/2 inch ball valve at the top of the chamber.
c. Type 2 (Manual): Short vertical section of pipe to form an air chamber at accessible
system high points with ball valve at top of chamber. Size valve for largest pipe within
the vented pipe system section as follows:
PIPE SIZE VALVE SIZE
6 inch and Smaller 3/4 inch
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 7
8 to 16 inch 1-1/2 inch
18 inch and Larger 2-1/2 inch
d. Type 3 (Automatic): Float type cast iron, brass or semi-steel body, copper float,
stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature and
pressure; installed with an isolating valve at air separators, tanks and other equipment;
B & G Model 87 or 107.
e. Type 4 (Automatic): Brass with hydroscopic fiber discs, vent ports, adjustable cap for
manual shut-off, and integral spring loaded ball check valve; for use at radiation and on
convectors; B & G Model 17 SR.
f. Type 5 (Manual): Brass coin-operated type for use on radiation; B & G Model 4V.
2. Drains:
a. Type 1: 3/4 inch ball valve with hose connection for use at piping system low points.
b. Type 2: Valve as scheduled for shut-off service, with hose connection for 3/4 inch size
and fire hose connections for 2-1/2 inch and 4 inch sizes, located at pipe system low
points. Size valve for largest pipe within the drained pipe system section as follows:
PIPE SIZE VALVE SIZE
6 inch and Smaller 3/4 inch
8 to 20 inch 2-1/2 inch
Above 20 inch 4 inch
c. Type 3: 1/2 inch ball valve with hose connection for use at coils, radiation and
convectors.
D. Air Separators:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Bell & Gossett.
b. Amtrol.
c. Taco.
2. In-line Air Separators: Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inches
and larger; tested and stamped in accordance with Section -VIIID of ANSI/ASME Code; for
125 psi operating pressure; B & G Models IAS and IAF.
3. Tangential Air Separators (Without Strainer): Steel, tested and stamped in accordance with
Section 8D of ANSI/ASME Code, for 125 psi minimum operating pressure, blowdown
nozzle, tangential inlet and outlet connections, and internal stainless steel air collector tube;
B & G Model Rolairtrol.
4. Provide line size air separator inlet and outlet connections.
5. Dip tube Fitting: For 125 psi operating pressure; to prevent free air collected in boiler from
rising into system; B & G Model Airtrol.
E. Strainers ('Y' and 'T' Type):
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Spirax/Sarco.
b. Armstrong.
c. Mueller.
d. Hayward.
2. Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Bronze body, threaded and soldered joints, Y pattern with 1/32
inch stainless steel perforated screen, 250 psi at 406 degrees F; Spirax/Sarco Model BT and
TBT Armstrong Model F4SC.
3. Size 2-1/2 Inch to 8 Inch: Cast iron body, flanged, Y pattern 125 psi at 450 degrees F;
Spirax/Sarco Model CI-125 Armstrong Model A1FL. Perforated stainless steel screening;
1/32 inch for sizes 2-1/2 and 3 inch, 1/16 inch for other sizes.
4. Size 10 Inch and Larger: Tee-type carbon steel or cast iron body, class 150 flanged or butt
weld connections, hinged access cover, 1/8 inch perforated steel basket, tapped for 3/4 inch
blowdown; Hayward Model 91.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 8
F. Optional Inlet Suction Fittings for End Suction Pumps:
1. Pump suction fittings may be used instead of strainer and pump manufacturer recommended
inlet diameters as detailed.
2. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Bell & Gossett Suction Diffuser.
b. Taco.
c. Allis Chalmers.
d. Armstrong.
3. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast iron body, flanged for 2-1/2 inch and larger, rated for 175 psi
working pressure, with inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings,
disposable fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and permanent magnet located in
flow stream and removable for cleaning.
4. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blow down and gauge tappings.
G. Optional Combination Pump Discharge Valves:
1. Combination pump discharge valves may be used instead of separate check valve, shutoff
valve and balancing valve as detailed.
2. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Bell & Gossett.
b. Taco.
3. Valves: Straight or angle pattern, flanged cast-iron valve body with bolt-on bonnet for 175
psi operating pressure, non-slam check valve with spring loaded bronze disc and seat,
stainless steel stem, and calibrated adjustment permitting flow regulation.
H. Relief Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Bell & Gossett.
b. Watts.
c. Kunkle.
d. Teledyne Farris.
2. Bronze body, threaded ends, viton seat seal, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic,
direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME Section IV certified and labeled. (Provide flanged
inlet / outlets with dielectric unions if relief valve larger than 2 inch size is required.)
I. Flow Sensors - Type 1 (2 Inch and Smaller):
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Bell & Gossett Model CB Circuit Setter.
b. Watts.
c. Armstrong Pump.
d. Tour & Anderson.
2. Calibrated brass or bronze balance valve with provisions for connecting a portable
differential pressure meter.
3. Meter connections shall have built-in check valves. An integral pointer shall register degree
of valve opening.
4. Construct valves with internal seals to prevent leakage around rotation element.
5. Furnish a calibrated curve to determine flow rate by means of pressure drop and valve
setting.
6. Construct valves for 300 psi working pressure at 250 degrees F; solder ends where
available. Insulation: Pre-formed block.
J. Flow Sensors - Type 2 (2-1/2 Inch to 8 Inch):
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Bell & Gossett Circuit Sensor Flow Meter Type A.
b. Watts.
c. Armstrong.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 9
2. Cast iron wafer-type with readout valves to facilitate connecting a differential pressure
meter to flow meter. Fit each readout valve with an integral check valve designed to
minimize system fluid loss during monitoring process. Provide a calibrated nameplate
detailing flow through a range of differential head pressures.
K. Flow Sensors - Type 3 (Option 1: 10 Inch and Larger):
1. Design Standard Manufacturer: Barco (Aeroquip). Substitutions subject to Section 00 26
00 are:
a. BIF.
b. Foxboro.
c. Armstrong.
d. Other Substitutions are not permitted.
2. Venturi type with flanged steel body.
L. Flow Sensor Meters:
1. Meter for Type 1 and Type 2 Flow Sensors: Portable differential meter with provisions for
hanging. Indicate readings in feet of water at maximum 40 foot range and accuracy of plus
or minus 1.0 percent full scale. Include necessary shutoff valves and purge valves. Include
10 foot long hoses with threaded connections, suitable for working pressure of 125 psi at
250 degrees F.
2. Meter for Type 3 Flow Sensor: Permanent type meter with provisions for permanent
mounting. Indicate readings in gallons per minute with accuracy of plus or minus 0.5
percent full scale. Include blow-down and isolation valves.
M. Balancing Valves:
1. 2 Inch and Smaller: See flow sensors above.
2. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Use valves scheduled for shut off duty. Include memory stop
(balance point) function.
3. Special Condition: Where butterfly valves are used on services for both balancing and shut
off, balancing valves specified may be used for both functions (delete shut off valves) when
located within 20 feet of shut off valve.
N. Expansion Compensators and Associated Guides:
1. Design Standard Manufacturer: KEFLEX. Substitutions subject to Section 00 26 00 are:
a. Metraflex.
b. Flexonics.
c. Other Substitutions are not permitted.
2. 2 Inch and Smaller: Model 7QT, brass case with stainless steel bellows rated for minimum
working pressure of 150 psi with minimum 1-1/2 inch compression and 1/2 inch extension.
Provide nylon block Model CTG guides.
3. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Model M308-1215, 150 psi rated and flanged carbon steel body with
tie rods, stainless steel bellows and liner, minimum 1-1/2 inch compression and 1/2 inch
(factory set) extension. Provide factory insulated carbon steel spider type guides in
accordance with Sections 23 05 29 and 23 07 00.
O. Glycol Fill System:
1. Provide preassembled, fabricated steel, skid mounted pump/tank package, factory piped and
wired for single pipe and power connections for installation. Package to be fabricated by
Bell & Gossett. Substitutions are permitted subject to Section 00 26 00.
2. Solution Pump: End suction type pump at 5 gallons per minute at 40 psig with maximum 1
horsepower motor, at 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz. Provide safety relief valve at
discharge of pump set to limit discharge pressure to maximum 44 PSIG including
overpressure. Safety Relief valve discharge shall be factory piped to discharge back into
solution tank.
3. Solution Tank: 55 gallon capacity polypropylene, with fabricated steel support stand, one
gallon graduated markings, molded polypropylene lid with recesses for mounting pump,
agitator, low liquid level switch and cold water make-up pipe.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 10
4. Agitator: Totally enclosed explosion-proof electric motor, stainless steel clamp and motor
mount, 1/2 or 5/8 inch diameter shaft and Type 316 stainless steel impellor, 120 volt, single
phase, 60 hertz with integral switch on unit, 3-wire grounded power cord with plug.
5. Piping and valves to be same as described in this section.
6. Provide the following factory installed piping options. Pipe materials, valves, etc. to be as
described in this section.
a. 3/4 inch drain valve with hose connection.
b. Shut-off valves prior to strainer on suction side of pump, and after balance valve on
discharge side of pump.
c. Unions at tank and pump connections.
d. Check Valve on pump discharge.
e. Strainer on suction side of pump.
f. Pressure gauges with pet-cocks upstream and downstream of strainer, and on pump
discharge piping.
g. Balance valve in pump discharge piping after check valve.
h. Safety relief valve (ASME Section VIII) on pump discharge pipe, prior to discharge
side balance and shut-off valves.
7. Provide the following factory prewired options:
a. Motor starter with fused disconnect, suitable for hardwired (3-wire grounded) electric
service, on a 30 amp circuit provided by Division 26. Contractor shall coordinate and
confirm Division 26 electric service circuit size, and have the manufacturer provide
appropriate fuse size / selection, as required based upon final motor size being provided
with the approved unit.
b. NEMA 4 enclosure. Control panel have a short circuit current rating (SCCR) of at least
10,000 amps.
c. Push button start/stop/reset.
d. Low level cut-off controls to automatically shut-off pumps when tank is empty.
P. Glycol Solution:
1. Manufacturers, Propylene Glycol: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Dow Chemical Dowfrost HD.
2. Non-petroleum base inhibited glycol and water solution pre-mixed 40 percent glycol by
volume.
Q. Excess Pressure Regulating Valve (Main line flow and pressure bypass valve)
1. Manufacturer: Samson model 41-73 and 2422/2425. No substitutions permitted.
2. Self-regulating, diaphragm type. 125 psi rated construction, cast iron body with stainless
steel bellows.
3. Pressure range set for 10psig-35psig manually adjustable in the field without hardware
modifications.
R. Relief and Back Pressure Valve
1. Design Standard Manufacturer: Watson McDaniel R-Series. Substitutions subject to 00 26
00.
2. Bronze body, seat and disc, threaded inlet and outlet connections. 300 psig rated
construction.
3. Provide with pressure adjustment screw capable of modifying integral spring for field
calibration of relief pressure setting.
4. Provide in line size with 25psig-100 psig pressure setting range.
S. Expansion Joints (Building Expansion Joint Applications and Pipe Expansion Applications):
1. Design Standard Manufacturer: Metraflex. Substitutions subject to Section 00 26 00 are:
a. Flexonics.
b. KEFLEX.
c. Other Substitutions are not permitted.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 11
2. Horizontal Pipe Applications:
a. Multiple pipe rack applications are to have each pipe’s loops, nested in the same
horizontal plane.
b. 2 Inch and Smaller: Model MLS; 316 stainless steel corrugated hose; 304 stainless
steel double braid; bronze solder type connection; minimum working pressure at 70
degree F of 750 psi.
c. 2-1/2 Inch to 4 Inch: Model MLF: 316 stainless steel corrugated hose; 304 stainless
steel double braid; Raised-face, welding neck, forged steel, 150 psi (flat faced when
matched to 125 psi flanges); ASTM A181, ANSI B16.5.
3. Vertical Pipe Applications:
a. Multiple pipe risers in the same vertical plane, to be provided with offsets, so that V-
loop can overlap adjacent risers.
b. 2 Inch and Smaller: Model VLS; 316 stainless steel corrugated hose; 304 stainless steel
double braid; bronze solder type connection; minimum working pressure at 70 degree F
of 750 psi.
c. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Model VLF; 316 stainless steel corrugated hose; 304 stainless
steel double braid; Raised-face, welding neck, forged steel, 150 psi (flat faced when
matched to 125 psi flanges); ASTM A181, ANSI B16.5.
T. Cooling Condensate Reclaim System:
1. Provide preassembled, fabricated steel, skid mounted pump/tank package, factory piped and
wired for single pipe and power connections for installation. Package to be fabricated by JL
Wingert Industries. Substitutions are permitted subject to Section 00 26 00.
2. Duplex Pumps: End suction type pump at 20 gallons per minute at 40 ft. hd. with 1.5
horsepower motor, at 460 volt, three phase, 60 hertz.
3. Tank: 30 gallon capacity polypropylene, with fabricated steel support stand, one gallon
graduated markings, molded polypropylene lid with 2 inch vent with Vent Cap, and 3 inch
inlet connections. Provide one 1.5 inch bottom outlet to pumps on skid, and a 3 inch
overflow on side of tank at approximate centerline at 6 inches from top of tank.
4. Provide piping and valves per detail on the drawings.
5. Provide the following factory installed piping options. Pipe materials, valves, etc. to be as
described in this section.
a. 3/4 inch drain valve with hose bibb connection.
b. Shut-off valves prior to strainer on suction side of pump.
c. Unions at tank and pump connections.
d. Check Valve on pump discharge.
e. Strainer on suction side of pump.
f. Pressure gauges with pet-cocks upstream and downstream of strainer, and on pump
discharge piping.
g. Combination shut-off / balance valve in pump discharge piping after check valve.
h. Manually operated butterfly valves for isolation of the tank assembly and a
normally closed butterfly valve as an equipment bypass to floor drain to allow for
servicing of the equipment without interruption to condensate removal Common
discharge electric solenoid valve (with electric actuator / spring return). Three
way solenoid control valve (with electric actuator / spring return) on inlet, with
three manual isolation shut-off valves (one per port) for isolation during servicing,
and a full 3 inch bypass with shut-off valve to allow flow to drain in event that the
3 way control valve is being isolated for servicing.
6. Provide the following factory prewired options:
a. Motor starters with disconnects.
b. Provide electric alternator, for alternating pump starts for even pump wear.
c. NEMA 4 enclosure.
d. DDC controller.
e. Four level switches. (High-high, High, Low, and Low-low.)
f. Aux. dry contacts for BAS remote general alarm monitoring.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 12
7. Sequence (programmed by manufacturers):
a. High Level – one pump “on”
b. Low Level – pumps “off”
c. Low-low level – pumps off, BAS alarmed, and manufacturer’s controller to reposition
3-way control valve to floor drain.
d. High-high level - pumps off, BAS alarmed, and manufacturer’s controller to reposition
3-way control valve to floor drain.
e. Alternate lead pump after each start/stop.
f. When pump is indexed “on” based upon level controls, the manufacturer’s controller
shall first open the discharge 2-way control valve, then start the pump.
g. When pump is indexed “off” based upon level controls, the manufacturer’s controller
shall close the discharge 2-way control valve and stop the pump.
h. If pump fails to start, then the standby pump shall automatically start.
i. If both pumps fail to start, then BAS alarmed, and manufacturer’s controller to
reposition 3-way control valve to floor drain.
j. Power failure to control panel, shall also generate an alarm to the BAS, and control
valves go to their fail positions. (3 way control valve to fail to floor drain, and
discharge control valve shall fail to the closed position.
2.4 STEAM SYSTEM VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Steam Traps Equipment:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Spirax/Sarco.
b. Armstrong.
c. Hoffman.
2. Float and Thermostatic Traps:
a. Low Pressure Steam (50 psig or less steam application): ASTM A126, cast iron or
semi-steel body and bolted cover for 125 psi SWP; provide access to internal parts
without disturbing piping; with bottom drain plug, stainless steel capsule type air vent,
stainless steel float, stainless steel lever and valve assembly. Spirax/Sarco Model FT,
Armstrong B and K Series.
b. Medium Pressure (Greater than 50 psig steam application): ASTM A216, steel body
and bolted cover for 465 psi SWP; provide access to internal parts without disturbing
piping; stainless steel capsule type air vent, stainless steel float, stainless steel lever and
valve assembly. Spirax/Sarco Model FT450.
3. Inverted Bucket Traps:
a. Medium Pressure steam (Greater than 50 psig to maximum 150 psig steam application):
Steel body and bolted cover, stainless steel bucket valve and seat, check valve, stainless
steel lever mechanism with knife edge operating surfaces. Spirax/Sarco Model HM34
or Series 600.
4. Thermodynamic Traps (High Pressure Steam in Tunnel): 600 psi rated, all stainless steel
construction, integral strainer. Spirax/Sarco Model TD-52.
B. Steam Traps (Main pipe and End of Main Applications)
1. Proprietary Manufacturer & Model: SteamGard Model EP System. Substitutions are not
permitted.
2. Trap: Modified Venturi Nozzle Type.
a. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller (Lower Pressure 50 psig or less steam and associated
condensate applications).
1) Pressure Class-150 body with ANSI/ASME B1.20 - NPT threaded connections.
2) Trap venture type: AISI type series (Austenitic) non-magnetic 300 series stainless
steel.
3) Strainer: Y-Type ASTM A350 Forged Carbon Steel; plated for corrosion
resistance; stainless steel basket with secondary filter screen; and ½ inch stainless
steel ball valve blow off valve with hose connection and removable threaded cap.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 13
b. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller (Medium and High Pressure greater than 50 psig to maximum
150 psig and associated condensate steam applications):
1) Pressure Class-250 (at 406°F) body with ANSI/ASME B1.20 - NPT threaded
connections.
2) Trap venture type: AISI type series (Austenitic) non-magnetic 303 stainless steel;
3) Strainer: Y-Type ASTM A-216 Carbon Steel; plated for corrosion resistance;
stainless steel basket; and ½ inch stainless steel ball valve blow off valve with hose
connection and removable threaded cap.
C. Strainers (Steam and Associated Steam Condensate Piping systems):
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Spirax/Sarco.
b. Armstrong.
c. Mueller Steam Specialties Company (Muessco).
2. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller (Lower Pressure 50 psig or less steam and associated condensate
applications): Bronze body, threaded ends, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel
perforated screen, 250 psi, Spirax/Sarco Model BT.
3. 2 Inch to 4 Inch (Low Pressure 50 psig or less steam and associated condensate
applications): Cast iron body, flanged, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated
screen, Spirax/Sarco Model 125 for 100 psi or less.
4. 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller (Medium and High Pressure greater than 50 psig to maximum 150
psig and associated condensate steam applications): Cast steel body, threaded ends, Y
pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen, minimum 300# Class, Spirax/Sarco
Model CT.
5. 2 Inch and Larger (Medium and High pressure greater than 50 psig to maximum 150 psig
and associated condensate steam applications): 150 psi cast steel body, flanged, Y pattern
with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen, Spirax/Sarco Model CSX-Y.
D. Steam Air Vents:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Spirax/Sarco.
b. Hoffman.
c. Armstrong.
2. Medium Pressure Steam and Low Pressure Steam: 125 psi brass body and cap with access
to internal parts without disturbing piping; stainless steel bellows and seat, Spirax/Sarco
Model T202.
3. High Pressure Steam: 300 psi sealed stainless steel body, Armstrong Model TTF.
E. Flash Tanks and Legs:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Penn Separator.
b. (Wilson Engineering) Industrial Steam.
c. Adamson.
2. Closed type, welded steel construction, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D
of ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code for 150 psi working pressure; cleaned,
prime coated, with steel support legs. Provide nozzles and tappings for installation of
accessories and piping connections. Flash steam vent to atmosphere (outside) or to lower
pressure steam system for flash steam recovery as required per details on drawing as
applicable.
F. Receivers:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Spirax Sarco.
b. Armstrong.
c. Mueller Steam Specialties Company.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 14
2. Condensate Receiver: Horizontal welded steel, ASME Code stamped construction for 125
psi working pressure with elevated, fabricated steel base, equipped with tappings for
mounting float switches, water level gauge, thermometers, pump suction fittings,
condensate inlet, and lifting eye bolts.
G. Self-Operated Pressure Reducing Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Cashco Model 1000 HP-3.
b. Spirax/Sarco Series 25P.
c. Leslie.
d. Spence Model ED.
2. Furnish valves with capacity for entering psi and discharge psi as shown. Valve pressure
range shall be manually adjustable.
3. Control valve shall be ANSI Class 300, self-operated, single seat, designed for dead end
service, and guaranteed to control delivery pressure with a 2 psi plus or minus variation.
Valve shall be diaphragm type, bronze, steel with stainless steel valve seat, trim and
diaphragm. End connections shall be threaded (NPT) for 1-1/2 inch and smaller valves and
300 psi flanges for 2 inch and larger valves.
4. Equip valve with a handwheel and locking lever.
H. Safety Relief Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Kunkle Valve Company.
b. Teledyne Farris.
c. Lonergan.
d. Spirax/Sarco.
e. Spence.
2. Size 1-1/2 Inch and Smaller: 300 psi, threaded ends, spring loaded, bronze body and
bonnet construction, brass trimmed, Spirax Sarco Series SV418.
3. Size 2 Inch and Larger: 300 spi flanges, spring loaded, cast steel construction, brass/bronze
trimmed. Spirax Sarco SV 74.
4. Capacities ASME Section VIII certified and stamped.
I. Drip Pan Elbows:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Kunkle Valve Company Figure 299.
b. Grinnell.
c. Spirax/Sarco.
2. Size to suit safety relief valve. Provide drain connections at bottom of elbow and pan.
3. Extend elbow pipe a minimum of 6 inches inside vent pipe.
4. Material: As specified for safety relief valve.
J. Exhaust Head:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Wright-Austin.
b. Penn Separator.
c. Anderson Separator.
2. Carbon steel with 304L stainless steel separating element and screen, 150 psi flanged.
3. Provide clips for guy wire attachment on sizes 18 inch and larger.
K. Steam Supply Silencer:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Quietflo Types LAS-MD and LAS-MDS as scheduled.
b. Casings: Welded carbon steel, stamped in accordance with ASME Code, Section 8,
Division 1, for 150 psi. Provide internal carbon steel perforated liner.
2. Packing: 6 pcf density glass fiber, rated for 1000 degrees F.
3. Inlet/Outlet Connections: 150 psi, flanged, ASTM A181, Grade 1, ANSI B16.5.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 15
L. Steam Meters:
1. Manufacturer: Yokogawa. Substitutions are not permitted.
2. In-Line Vortex Steam Meter: Series YF100 Style-E with ANSI 300 psi raised face flange,
with stainless steel shedder bar and body. Accuracy to be at least plus/minus 3 percent of
reading, with repeatability of plus/minus 3 percent.
a. Meter shall be sized for steam flow rates listed in schedules on Contract documents.
Meter shall be capable of a minimum 3 to 1 turndown.
b. Meter to be installed in accordance with the manufacturers upstream/downstream
straight run requirements.
c. Meter shall provide a 4-20 mA output signal proportional to instantaneous flow, to
Section 25 10 00.
3. Provide a remote wall mounted converter/transmitter, Series YFA11 with a 4-20 mA, two-
wire output signal, loop- powered by an external 24 Vdc power supply. Include
interconnecting cable between meter and transmitter/converter.
4. Provide pipe-mounted pressure transmitter, Series EJA430A. Transmitter shall be 2 wire
loop powered device with 4-20 mA output signal. Install transmitter with steam pigtail.
5. Provide pipe-mounted temperature transmitter with stainless steel thermowell, Series YTA.
Transmitter shall accept RTD input and provide a 4-20 mA output signal. Fill thermowell
with conductive gel. Include platinum rigid 100 or 1000 ohm RTD for insertion into
thermowell.
6. Provide a wall mounted local flow computing totalizer, Series YFCT. Provide loop power,
as well as accept input signals from, the associated pressure and temperature transmitters
and the steam meter. Totalizer shall provide a local display of instantaneous flow, totalized
flow and pressure/temperature readings.
M. Steam Exhaust Silencer:
1. Manufacturers: American Air Filter Style A-101. Substitutions are not permitted.
2. Carbon Steel, 12 gauge minimum, 300 psi flanged.
3. Provide with weather hood and clips for guy wire attachment.
N. Non-Return Stop and Check Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Crane Model 28-E.
2. 10 inch and smaller; Class 250, iron body, wye pattern, bolted bonnet, flanged ends; 2-1/2
inch body drains; complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 1.
O. Pressure Powered Pumps:
1. Manufacturers: Substitutions are not permitted.
a. Spirax/Sarco.
b. Johnson Corporation.
c. Clark Reliance.
2. Packaged triplex pumping unit with vented receiver and piping auxiliaries.
3. Maximum Operating Steam Pressure: 150 psi.
4. Receiver and Pump Body Construction: Cast steel or welded steel, ASME labeled.
5. Pump Internal Working Parts: All stainless steel construction, float-operated, snap-acting
mechanism.
6. Inlet and Outlet Check and Gate Valves: Bronze or steel.
7. Accessories: Gauge glass, cycle counter, insulation cover.
P. Expansion Joints for Steam Systems Operating at 15 psig or less (Building Expansion Joint
Applications and Pipe Expansion Applications):
1. Design Standard Manufacturer: Metraflex. Substitutions subject to Section 00 26 00 are:
a. Flexonics.
b. KEFLEX.
c. Other Substitutions are not permitted.
2. Horizontal Pipe Applications:

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 16
a. Multiple pipe rack applications are to have each pipe’s loops, nested in the same
horizontal plane.
b. 2 Inch and Smaller: Model MLT; 316 stainless steel corrugated hose; 304 stainless
steel double braid; schedule 40 threaded connection; saturated steam pressure rating:
300 psig.
c. 2-1/2 Inch to 10 Inch: Model MLF: 316 stainless steel corrugated hose; 304 stainless
steel double braid; Raised-face, welding neck, forged steel, 150 psi (flat faced when
matched to 125 psi flanges); ASTM A181, ANSI B16.5. Saturated steam pressure
rating: 100 psig.
d. All steam application expansion loops shall be mounted in the horizontal and provided
with appropriate guides and supports in order to allow for the proper flow of
condensate. Provide steam traps on both sides of the flexible expansion loop. Provide
per manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Follow Section 23 05 05 regarding pipe installation procedures and other provisions.
B. Follow Section 01 45 00 for Quality Control of installation.
C. Use valves of same sizes as pipe in which they are installed, except for flow control valves
furnished under Section 25 10 00.
D. Pipe refrigerant equipment pressure relief devices to an acceptable location outdoors.
E. Provide additional piping lengths when required to connect to Owner furnished equipment.
Example: Air handling units may be purchased in smaller configurations than shown on
Drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION, REFRIGERANT SYSTEM VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Refrigerant Driers: Mount drier vertically in liquid line adjacent to receiver with bypass
assembly to permit isolation of drier for servicing.
B. Filter Driers: Install with bypass assembly to permit isolation for servicing.
C. Expansion Valves: Locate valve sensing bulb immediately after evaporator outlet on suction
side.
3.3 INSTALLATION, WATER SYSTEM VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Support tanks inside building from building structure.
B. Pipe air gap fitting on backflow preventer to nearest floor drain.
C. Provide Type 1 air vents and drain valves at system high points and low points outside of
mechanical equipment rooms. Provide Type 2 air vents and drain valves within mechanical
equipment rooms. Provide each section of isolated piping with air vents and drain valves.
D. Use Type 3 air vents in ceiling spaces and other concealed or non-accessible locations; provide
vent tubing to nearest drain.
E. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank.
F. Provide strainers to protect automatic control valves.
G. Provide full size valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection. Use
valves specified for shut-off duty.
H. Where disposable strainer screens are used, remove screen after system has been cleaned and
replace with permanent screen.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 17
I. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports. Locate pumped condensate
check valves per manufacturer's recommendations.
J. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of pressure reducing valves, heat
exchangers and expansion tanks.
K. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve
capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment.
L. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.
M. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual
vent areas.
N. Locate flow sensors adjacent to balancing valves within manufacturer's guidelines.
O. Install flow sensors in existing water systems prior to interruption of those systems for any other
purpose. See preliminary balance requirements in Section 23 05 93.
P. Provide specified equipment (meters, instruments and related devices) for system balancing.
Turn over portable equipment to Balancing Agency in time for scheduled system balance.
Q. Self-Contained Control Valves: Install sensor away from valve body. Install dial operator on
wall away from radiation. Install dial in heating unit enclosure, and sensor in return air stream.
R. Do not add glycol solution to systems until systems have been cleaned and flushed. Refer to
Section 23 25 10.
S. Feed glycol solution to system through make-up line with pressure regulator, venting system
high points.
T. Test strength of glycol and water solution. Submit written test results.
1. Provide anodic inhibitors and environmental stabilizers in concentrations required to
maintain glycol manufacturer's recommended levels.
2. Perform inhibitor and stabilizer level checking and maintenance:
a. Immediately after installation.
b. After 3 months.
c. After 6 months.
d. Immediately prior to end of warranty period.
U. Provide Pipe T-fitting, elbow and short vertical pipe section at air vent pipe connections to Air
Separators and Expansion Tanks, with threaded and capped termination for potential use of field
installed pressure relief valve.
V. All relief valves with threaded inlets and outlets, to be provided with unions on outlet pipe to
facilitate relief valve removal / replacements. Provide soldered to threaded adapter at inlet (and
outlet) where connecting to copper piping.
3.4 INSTALLATION, STEAM SYSTEM VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Unless otherwise noted, size traps for steam loads indicated at a maximum drop of 1/2 psi for F
& T traps and 5 psi for bucket traps.
B. Trap sizing assumes condensate at steam temperature, with a 3 to 1 safety factor for equipment,
and 2 to 1 safety factor for steam piping drips using 10 percent flow or flows scheduled.
C. Where steam load is not indicated, make trap sizes same as adjoining pipe.
D. Traps used on steam mains and branches shall be minimum 3/4 inch size.
E. Install thermostatic steam traps to drain condensate from steam radiation units, convectors and
other similar terminal heating units.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 18
F. Install float and thermostatic traps to drain condensate from unit heaters, convectors, heating
coils, steam separators, flash tanks, heat exchangers, steam jacketed equipment, and direct steam
injected equipment.
G. Install SteamGuard steam traps to drain condensate from steam main headers and branch lines
for steam pressure up to 150 psi.
H. Provide main / end of main trap stations as shown and as follows:
1. Base of risers.
2. Changes in elevation.
3. Ends of mains.
4. Before control valves.
5. At intervals of 100 feet on mains with pressures of 100 psi and below.
6. At intervals of 250 feet on mains with pressures above 100 psi.
I. Traps 1 inch and smaller shall have union connections. Traps 1-1/4 to 2-1/2 inch shall have
threaded flange connections. All other traps shall have welded flanges.
J. Remove thermostatic elements from steam traps during temporary and trial usage, and until
system has been operated and dirt pockets cleaned of sediment and scale.
K. Install air vents at end of steam mains, and at points in system where air may accumulate.
L. Pitch (slope) steam and condensate piping tunnel piping slope: one inch in 20 feet; Other
locations piping slope: one inch in 10 feet minimum in direction of flow, unless otherwise
shown.
M. Pressure reducing station shall be one or two stages as indicated to produce flat reduced pressure
curve over range of capacity.
N. Install full size valve bypasses in steam gate valve bosses where shown and around equipment
service isolation valves larger than 6 inches.
O. Mount pressure controller near pressure reducing valves. Provide piping from controller to
sensors and valves.
P. Rate safety relief valves for pressure upstream of pressure reducing station, for full operating
capacity. Set relief at maximum 20 percent above reduced pressure.
Q. Pipe safety relief valves to outdoors. Provide drip pan elbow with drain connection to nearest
floor drain.
R. When several safety relief valve vents are connected to a common header, header cross section
area shall equal sum of individual vent outlet areas.
S. Provide exhaust heads on CRU vents.
T. Steam and High Temperature Water Expansion Joints: Prior to making final connection of slip
joint to pipe, verify required amount of slip compression with manufacturer, to ensure free
movement of pipe from installation temperature to minimum and maximum temperatures.
U. Install strainers in horizontal steam pipes upstream of control valves, pressure reducing valves
and meters, with Y-Lateral rotated to the horizontal plane not facing vertically down.
V. Provide expansion loops on both sides of building expansion joints.
1. Horizontal Loop Application:
a. Supported pipe and loop with hanger rod and spring type isolator for minimum first two
hangers upstream and downstream pipe mains, and for the central loop support.
b. Adjust hangers to keep loop and main pipe served level and allow for movement in
pipe.
c. Contractor shall coordinate nested pipe loop dimension to allow all pipes in the rack to
remain level without rises or drops in pipe and loop elevation.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 19
2. Vertical Riser Applications:
a. Loop including its joint connections shall be at an accessible height of maximum 7 ft.
maximum above shaft floor.
b. Loops in shafts to be accessible for periodic inspection and/or replacement.
c. Provide access doors of adequate size and location, in shaft wall to allow shaft internal
access, for inspection and replacement of loops.
d. Supported loop with hanger rod with spring type isolator at the central loop support.
e. Support pipe risers via hanger with spring isolator in horizontal pipe within 6 inches of
the elbow where pipe turns down in shaft.
f. Provide pipe support steel that spans shaft walls and hanger rods with isolators
installation.
g. Where pipe risers are higher than 15 feet or exceed MSS support spacing requirements,
then the contractor is to also provide pipe clamps at intermediate spacing with support
steel, pipe hanger rods with spring isolators at those points.
3.5 FIELD TESTING
A. Test installed refrigerant piping systems following ANSI/ASME B31.5.
B. Test installed water and steam piping systems hydrostatically following ANSI/ASME B31.9
except that piping beyond the limitations of materials, size, temperature, pressure and service
specified in ANSI/ASME B31.9 shall be tested following ANSI/ASME B31.1.
1. Piping shall be flushed and cleaned per Section 23 25 10 requirements prior to hydrostatic
testing, filled with water with all high points vented.
2. System piping to be tested to the following pressures not to exceed pressure rating of any
installed component to be tested:
a. Heat / reheat hot water system: 125 psig.
b. Preheat hot water / glycol system: 125 psig.
c. Chilled water systems: 125 psig.
d. Low Pressure Steam systems: 125 psig.
e. Low Pressure Steam Condensate Return systems: 125 psig.
f. Medium Pressure Steam systems: 150 psig.
g. Medium Pressure Steam Condensate Return systems: 150 psig.
h. High Pressure Steam systems: 150 psig.
i. High Pressure Steam Condensate Return systems: 150 psig.
j. Pumped Condensate System: 125 psig.
k. Prior to testing, submit for review and approval test protocol, test pressure, and listing
of any isolated component and associated rating.
l. Test lower rated components at their working pressure limit, and sequentially remove
devices or isolate such devices/equipment with manual shut-off valves equipment and
re-test to maximum test pressure. Ensure manual shut-off isolation valves are rated for
dead end shut-off at stated test pressure.
3. Only use water at ambient temperatures. Hold test pressure for a minimum of 4 hours or
duration necessary to inspect the full system and all tested components/fittings for leaks.
Inspected to determine any leaks/weeping and identify cause of any loss of pressure
(correction for temperature change shall be included in the test measures).
4. Contractor may pressure test piping in sections, but all joints, connections, fitting and
similar not included in the partial test shall remain exposed, un-insulated and visible for
inspection; the final complete system shall be tested as a whole, included exposed joints
which had not been included in prior testing. Contractor shall remain responsible for “total
system leak test compliance” whether in sectional or full complete system test. Prior partial
or sectional system test(s) do not relieve the contractor of compliance for final system test.
5. Source of leaks or pressure loss found during tests are to be repaired and piping retested.
a. Mechanical or Threaded Joints:
1) Tighten joints using discretion or
2) Take joint apart and replace defective material.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 20
b. Soldered Joints: Take joint apart, clean both tube and fitting, and remake joint.
c. Welded Joints:
3.6 DEMONSTRATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Follow Section 01 79 00.
B. Provide two hours of instruction on annual maintenance of glycol inhibitor levels.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
HEATING AND COOLING PIPING
23 20 10 - 21
SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes Fire Alarm System (FAS), associated with Module M and N project.
B. All components shall be FM approved and UL listed for local protective signaling systems, and
designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 72 and all referenced standards.
C. The new FAS shall be integrated into the existing site wide Honeywell XLS-3000 Enterprise
Building System protected premises, multiplexed, fire alarm system with emergency one-way
communications and proprietary supervising station connection. The existing system is
currently serviced by Honeywell. Contract with Honeywell to provide design services, shop
drawings, furnish equipment, installation supervision, warranty service, and documentation
required by governing codes.
D. Preconstruction Testing and System Shutdowns:
1. Obtain a copy of As-Built Honeywell Fire Alarm System XLS-Net and Building
Automation System record drawings.
E. General description of work required for this project is as follows:
1. Provide a protected premises, voice-capable, fire alarm system protecting Bldg. M and N to
include manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm, sprinkler waterflow alarm, sprinkler
supervision, sprinkler releasing, audible and visual alarm notification appliances, and
interfaces with various building signal and control systems.
2. Provide new control panels, remote annunciator and control panels, manual pull stations,
door holders, door lock release, auxiliary relays to cut power to automatic door operators at
fire rated opening, spot type smoke and heat detectors, duct mounted smoke detectors,
audible and visual notification devices, elevator recall and shutdown relays, fan shutdown
and damper control modules, monitoring of sprinkler valves, flow switches, fire suppression
systems, monitoring of early warning aspiration type smoke detection and other devices and
accessories required for a complete system as shown on Drawings and as required to meet
the performance of this Section.
3. This Section provides audible and visual notification appliances for indicating HVAC upset
conditions to be integrated into the FAS.
4. Modifications to existing components of the fire alarm system throughout the site required
as a result of new work shall be part of this Contract, including software modifications for
proprietary supervising station graphics, zone schedules, Honeywell Enterprise Buildings
Integrator workstation programming and graphics, upgrading battery, power supplies and
voice amplification, expansion or addition of circuit boards or modules where required.
5. Each FAS shall be networked to the existing campus fire alarm network. Tie ins to existing
Honeywell XLS-NET including fiber optic and copper network data cables required for
reporting signals and alarms specified herein shall be part of the Work of this Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 42 00 - Reference Standards and Definitions.
B. Section 21 10 00 - Standpipe and Sprinkler Systems, for fire protection.
C. Section 26 05 05 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, for electrical general provisions.
D. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices, for fittings, junction and pull boxes.
E. Section 26 05 19 - Conductors and Cables, for low voltage cables and conductors.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 31 00 - 1
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. International Building Code 2015 – New Jersey Edition.
B. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
C. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.
D. UL – Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. requirements and labeling.
E. U.S. Department of Justice, Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA): Accessibility Guidelines
for Buildings and Facilities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit point-to-point wiring diagrams for each area. Point-to-point wiring
diagrams shall detail each fire alarm device location and all wire runs to the Fire Alarm Control
Panel location, and all wire runs to all associated peripheral equipment. Submit, with the
drawings, a separate new layout drawing for each new panel and reconfigured fire alarm related
panel on the project. Each panel layout drawing shall detail all new component changes and all
wiring entering and leaving the panel. Submit, with each layout drawing, the labeling of all
inter-panel components and modules, including power supplies, terminal strips, input and output
modules, etc. Shop drawings shall include a complete fire alarm zone schedule layout outlining
all input and output points for the system, related equipment and peripherals, and shall be
referenced to the Specification Section Number.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data, including data sheets on all new
components, devices, wire and cable,
C. Calculations: Power requirement calculations for visual notification appliance circuits, amplifier
loading, speaker circuit loading and battery sizing calculations for all fire alarm equipment.
D. Complete Submittal Package Documentation: All drawings, diagrams, layouts, and product data
for the Fire Alarm System submittal shall be submitted as one package. Drawings submitted
without product data or data submitted without drawings will be rejected without review. Failure
to provide complete documentation as outlined above shall be cause for immediate rejection
without comment.
E. Field Test Report: As specified in Part 3.
F. Guarantee and Preventative Maintenance Contract: As specified in Part 3.
G. Record Drawings:
1. Deliver record (“as-built”) documentation for all components of the Fire Alarm System
before requesting final acceptance of the system.
2. All shop drawings originally submitted shall be resubmitted. The resubmitted drawings and
details shall show actual installed wiring and labeling information and shall include any
device or component changes made during the construction phase of the project.
3. End-of-line (EOL) device locations shall be shown for all devices on the project.
4. Maintenance, installation and instruction manuals for all equipment shall also be included
with the record package.
5. All record documentation shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 77 01.
1.5 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Environmental Conditions: Central fire alarm equipment shall operate under ambient
environmental conditions of thirty-five degrees (35 degrees F) to one hundred twenty-two
degrees (122 degrees F) Fahrenheit and zero percent (0%) to ninety-five percent (95%) relative
humidity (RH) non-condensing. Detectors and other peripheral equipment shall operate under
the ambient temperature, humidity and vibration conditions normally encountered for the
installed locations.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 31 00 - 2
B. Materials and Equipment: All equipment shall be compatible with the existing Honeywell
building fire alarm system. Where multiple units of the same type are required, the units shall be
the products of a single manufacturer.
C. Separate, stand-alone, fire alarm systems shall be provided for Building M and Building N. Each
FAS shall be fully capable of stand-alone operation.
D. All circuits shall be Class “A” and installed in conduit throughout. Initiating Device Circuits
(IDC), Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) and Addressable Device Signaling Line Circuits
(SLC) shall conform to the current NFPA 72 style and class definitions in use at the BMS
Lawrenceville campus.
E. Remote Control Relay, Door Holder and Door Lock Circuits: 24 Vdc power required for
operation of fire door releasing devices, auxiliary relays, etc., shall be provided as part of the fire
alarm system scope. Provide normally energized “fail-safe” circuits for driving remote relays so
that failure of wiring produces the same action as would result from an alarm condition.
F. DC Power Circuits: Power supply circuits serving devices or equipment which require external
DC power shall be considered as “installation wiring” and shall conform to requirements of style
of operation specified for IDC’s, NAC’s or SLC’s connected to equipment being powered.
G. SLC’s for addressable devices shall not be loaded beyond 50 percent of their capacity in terms of
address availability or current capacity. NAC’s shall not be loaded beyond 67 percent of their
rated capacity.
H. Power supplies shall not be loaded beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity.
I. Standby Battery Capacity: Provide standby batteries with capacity sufficient to power a load
equal to the rating of power supplies backed up for 24 hours, followed immediately by 15
minutes of full all-call alarm operation.
J. Audible alarm notification appliances shall be tapped at power settings adequate to produce
audible alarm signals that meet or exceed sound levels prescribed by the International Building
Code Year 2015 New Jersey Edition and NFPA 72 in all areas of the building. Audio amplifiers
shall not be loaded beyond 50 percent of their rated capacity. Audio amplifiers shall be
supervised and provided with backup amplifiers. Backup amplifiers shall be permitted to be
automatically switched to replace any one of the group of amplifiers at any location.
K. Relay contact ratings of fire alarm equipment shall be adequately rated for the intended use.
Where control unit relay or addressable relay contacts are not adequately rated to handle the
load, provide auxiliary relays that are adequately rated.
L. Verify that the locations, quantities and models of audible fire alarm notification appliances
shown on contract drawings will achieve sound levels that meet or exceed levels mandated by
governing codes. Add appliances where required for audibility.
1.6 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. The activation of fire alarm, supervisory and trouble initiating devices shall cause the fire alarm
system to perform alarm, control and notification functions as shown on Sequence of Operation
on drawings.
B. Smoke detector alarms shall be subject to an “alarm verification feature” defined in NFPA 72.
Verification time periods shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s UL listing for this feature.
Other alarm initiating devices and smoke detectors required for cross-zoned operations shall not
be subject to alarm verification.
C. Fire evacuation zones shall be arranged in accordance with zones shown on Drawings and as
coordinated with fire separations between buildings. Building M and Building N are to be
considered separate buildings in so far as fire evacuation is concerned. An alarm in Building M
shall evacuate only Building M. An alarm in Building N shall evacuate only Building N.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 31 00 - 3
D. FAS shall monitor Building Automation System (BAS) alarms for indication of HVAC upset
conditions. BAS alarms shall activate audible evacuation messages and blue strobes in
accordance with emergency evacuation zones as shown on Drawings and indicated in sequence
of operation on Drawings.
E. HVAC upset emergency alarms shall be arranged in accordance with HVAC zones shown on
Drawings. An HVAC upset emergency shall signal evacuation of only the zone related to the
alarm. Provide visual notification appliances with both clear UL-1971 listed strobes for fire
evacuation signals and blue UL-1638 listed strobes for HVAC upset condition signaling.
F. Receipt of an alarm indicating an HVAC upset condition shall initiate blue visual alarms to flash
and an audible message matching the existing currently in use on the campus.
G. All visual notification appliances (strobes) located in corridors and areas with more than one
strobe shall be synchronized to flash simultaneously. Except where a single appliance covers a
single room, visual alarm notification appliances shall be synchronized.
H. Fire doors shall be released upon an alarm signal from a smoke detector associated with that fire
door or in accordance with building security schedules as indicated in the sequences of operation
for specific doors on the security drawings. Coordinate with security system drawings.
I. Elevator controllers shall be signaled to recall elevators to the alternate landing floor upon an
alarm signal from elevator lobby smoke detector at the main landing floor associated with that
elevator. Elevators controllers shall be signaled to recall elevators to the main landing floor
upon an alarm from any other elevator lobby smoke detector, elevator machine room smoke
detector. Elevator controllers shall be signaled to flash the fireman’s warning light upon an
alarm from a smoke detector in the elevator machine room associated with that elevator.
J. Elevator shunt-trip disconnect switches shall be signaled to remove main operating power from
elevators upon an alarm from a heat detector in the elevator machine room associated with that
elevator. Loss of control power to the shunt-trip mechanism shall initiate a supervisory signal
within the fire alarm system.
K. Upon receipt of an alarm signal from an air duct mounted smoke detector at the AHU or
fire/smoke damper, the VFDs associated with the AHU fans shall be signaled to stop the related
AHU fans.
L. Fire alarm system shall control fire/smoke dampers via relays at each damper. Refer to HVAC
drawings for coordinating placement of relays. Provide auxiliary relays for 120 volt actuators.
Dampers shall close upon duct smoke detector activation. Dampers shall remain closed until fire
alarm system is reset. Fire alarm system shall open dampers when air handling system startup is
signaled by BAS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Alarm System equipment as specified herein shall be as manufactured by Honeywell. All
devices shall be UL listed compatible with existing fire alarm panel. Unless noted otherwise in
this Section, no substitutions will be permitted.
B. Audible and Visual Devices Design Standard Manufacturer:
1. Wheelock, Inc.
2. Honeywell.
3. System Sensor.
4. Substitutions are subject to Section 00 26 00.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 31 00 - 4
2.2 PROPRIETARY MANUFACTURER
A. The fire alarm system manufacturer shall be Honeywell for compatibility with existing fire
alarm systems. Unless otherwise noted, all products shall be manufactured or supplied by
Honeywell. Substitutions shall not be permitted without Owner approval.
B. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP): Honeywell XLS3000
1. UL 864 and 1480 listed fire alarm equipment.
2. LCD annunciator for alarm, trouble, and supervisory conditions.
3. Controls for acknowledging changes of state, initiating live voice messages to building
occupants, and overriding automatic functions.
4. Multiplexed digital communications with initiating devices, fire alarm control units,
annunciators, and existing fire alarm systems.
5. Incorporates power supplies, amplifiers, circuit modules, and standby batteries as specified
to support fire alarm devices and circuits.
C. Fire Alarm Remote Annunciator and Control Panel (FAAP): Honeywell XLS3000
1. UL 864 and 1480 listed fire alarm equipment.
2. LCD annunciator for alarm, trouble, and supervisory conditions.
3. Controls for acknowledging changes of state, initiating live voice messages to building
occupants, and overriding automatic functions.
4. Multiplexed digital communications with fire alarm control panel.
5. Incorporates power supplies, circuit modules and standby batteries as specified.
D. Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACU): Honeywell XLS3000
1. UL 864 and 1480 listed fire alarm equipment.
2. Multiplexed digital communications with fire alarm control panel.
3. Incorporates power supplies, amplifiers, circuit modules and standby batteries as specified
to support new fire alarm devices and circuits.
E. Addressable Spot Type Photoelectric Smoke Detector:
1. UL 268 listed for open area smoke detection and listed as compatible with fire alarm control
panel.
2. Photoelectric light-scattering smoke detection principle.
3. Alarm verification and drift compensation.
F. Addressable Duct Mounted Photoelectric Smoke Detector:
1. UL 268A listed for air duct smoke detection and listed as compatible with fire alarm control
panel.
2. Photoelectric light-scattering smoke detection principle.
3. Alarm verification and drift compensation.
4. Provide with housing, sampling tubes, and remote alarm/test stations.
G. Addressable Spot Type Heat Detector:
1. UL listed for open area heat detection and listed as compatible with fire alarm control panel.
2. Combination 135 degrees F fixed temperature and rate-of-rise.
H. Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Station:
1. UL listed.
2. Semi-flush mounted, single-action with key reset and red face matching site standard.
3. Integral interface electronics for connection to addressable device SLC.
I. Audible Alarm Notification Appliances, Wall Mounted: SpectrAlert Advance.
1. UL listed 4 inch cone speaker, flush mounted with WHITE cover plate.
2. UL 1480 listed speaker.
3. Minimum output of 86dBA at 10 feet.
4. Tap adjustable from 1/8 to 2 watts and for either 25 or 70 volts.
5. White rectangular faceplate.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 31 00 - 5
J. Visual Notification Appliance, Clear, Wall Mounted: SpectrAlert Advance.
1. Semi-flush mounting, WHITE faceplate.
2. UL standard 1971 listed xenon strobe with clear Lexan lens.
3. Candela rating as indicated on Drawings.
4. Flash rate of 1 flash per second minimum.
5. Meet NFPA/ANSI standards and ADA accessibility guidelines.
6. 24 volt DC operation.
7. In/Out screw terminals shall accept wiring from #12 to #18 AWG.
K. Visual Notification Appliance, Blue, Wall Mounted: SpectrAlert Advance
1. Semi-flush mounting, WHITE faceplate.
2. UL standard 1638 listed xenon strobe with Blue Lexan lens.
3. Candela rating as indicated on Drawings.
4. Flash rate of 1 flash per second minimum.
5. Meet NFPA/ANSI standards and ADA accessibility guidelines.
6. 24 volt DC operation.
7. In/Out screw terminals shall accept wiring from #12 to #18 AWG.
L. Visual Notification Appliance, Blue, Ceiling Mounted: Wheelock Exceder Series STWC-NB
1. Semi-flush mounting, round housing, WHITE faceplate.
2. UL standard 1638 listed xenon strobe with Blue Lexan lens.
3. Candela rating as indicated on Drawings.
4. Flash rate of 1 flash per second minimum.
5. Meet NFPA/ANSI standards and ADA accessibility guidelines.
6. 24 volt DC operation.
7. In/Out screw terminals shall accept wiring from #12 to #18 AWG.
M. Audible/Visual Notification Appliance, Clear Strobe, Wall Mounted: SpectrAlert Advance
1. Semi-flush mounting, WHITE faceplate.
2. UL listed strobe and speaker specified above in combination mounting, WHITE cover plate.
3. Candela rating as indicated on Drawings.
N. Audible/Visual Notification Appliances, Clear Strobe, Ceiling Mounted: SpectrAlert L-Series
1. UL listed 4 inch cone speaker, flush mounted with WHITE cover plate.
2. Tap adjustable from 1/8 to 2 watts and for either 25 or 70 volts.
3. Sound output minimum 86 dB at 10 feet at one watt.
O. Audible/Visual Notification Appliance, Clear/Blue, Wall Mounted: SpectrAlert Advance
1. Dual strobe expander plate SEP-SW; LENS-B.
2. Semi-flush mounting, WHITE faceplate.
3. UL 1971 listed clear strobe, “FIRE”.
4. UL 1638 listed blue strobe, “ALERT”.
5. UL 1480 listed speaker adjustable from 1/8 to 2 watts and for either 25 or 70 volts
6. WHITE cover plate.
7. Candela rating as indicated on Drawings.
P. Visual Notification Appliance, Clear/Blue, Wall Mounted: SpectrAlert Advance
1. Dual strobe expander plate SEP-SW; LENS-B.
2. Semi-flush mounting, WHITE faceplate.
3. UL 1971 listed clear strobe, “FIRE”.
4. UL 1638 listed blue strobe, “ALERT”.
5. WHITE cover plate.
6. Candela rating as indicated on Drawings.
Q. Audible Alarm Notification Appliances, Ceiling Mounted: SpectrAlert Advance
1. UL 1480 listed speaker.
2. 4 inch cone speaker, flush mounted with WHITE cover plate.
3. Tap adjustable from 1/8 to 2 watts and for either 25 or 70 volts.
10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018
Module M & N - Addendum 6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 31 00 - 6
4. Sound output minimum 86 dB at 10 feet at one watt.
R. Addressable Monitoring Modules:
1. Interfaces and supervises normally open or normally closed contacts.
2. UL listed compatible with existing fire alarm control panel.
3. Use dual input model for monitoring side by side flow and tamper switches.
S. Explosion Proof Speaker: Federal Signal Model 300X
1. UL 1480 listed speaker.
2. NEC Class 1, Division 1/2, Group B (hydrogen).
3. Internal gain control allows output adjustment from 0dBA to 110dBA at 10 feet.
T. Explosion Proof Blue Strobe: Federal Signal Model 24XST
1. UL Listed for Class 1, Division 2, Group B (hydrogen).
2. Interior Lens Assembly: Blue.
U. Explosion Proof Clear Strobe: Federal Signal Model 24XST
1. UL Listed for Class 1, Division 2, Group B.
2. Interior Lens Assembly: Clear.
V. Fire Alarm Notification Appliance Power Supply: Honeywell HPF24S8, or approved
substitution.
W. Audible/Visual Notification Appliance, Clear Strobe, Weatherproof: SpectrAlert Advance
1. Semi-flush mounting, WHITE faceplate, “FIRE” label.
2. UL listed strobe and speaker in combination mounting.
3. Candela rating as indicated on Drawings.
4. WTP-SPW weatherproof plate.
5. SPSWK model for outdoor applications.
6. Designed for outdoor use and temperatures from -40degF to 151degF.
X. Visual Notification Appliance, Blue Strobe, Weatherproof: Edwards 868STRB-AQ
1. Weatherproof, surface mounting housing, WHITE or GRAY faceplate.
2. UL listed strobe, blue lens.
3. Candela rating as indicated on Drawings.
4. Designed for outdoor use and temperatures from -40degF to 151degF.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other trades and contractors.
B. Where products or materials specified in accordance with this Section are to be installed by
others, provide technical support during the installation to assure proper installation in
accordance with this Section.
C. Coordinate the location of ceiling mounted equipment with reflected ceiling plans.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire alarm system equipment following Section 01 45 00 for quality control of installation,
and in accordance with referenced codes.
B. The fire alarm system device locations on floor plans are intended to generally indicate areas
where such devices are to be located. Installer shall, with aid of supplier’s technical
representative, be responsible for determining final location of these devices in accordance with
referenced codes.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 31 00 - 7
C. Riser diagrams are schematic and do not show every conduit, wire box, fitting, or other
accessories. Provide such materials as necessary for a complete and functioning installation.
Install in accordance with referenced codes and these specifications. Use weatherproof
equipment for outdoor installations.
D. Provide, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, all components, wiring, conditions,
conduit and outlet boxes required for the installation of a complete and operational fire alarm
system extension as specified herein and shown on the drawings.
E. All fire alarm, signaling, and related control wiring shall be installed in conduit throughout.
Conduit shall be factory painted red and junction boxes shall be painted red. Fire alarm wiring
shall be installed in conformance with NEC Article 760. Related control wiring shall be
installed in conformance with NEC Article 725.
1. Rigid Galvanized Steel: Hazardous areas, mechanical and electrical rooms, wet areas,
sterile or clean areas, non-concealed spaces or where subject to physical damage.
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Non-hazardous, dry, concealed areas where not subject to
physical damage.
F. All fire alarm wiring shall be Class “A” and in accordance with Fire Alarm System
Manufacturer’s specifications. In addition, the following installation requirements shall apply:
1. Provide signal circuit wiring and signal circuit zoning as required, such that all audible and
visual signals, including those at the end of each run, receive full power as required for
proper operation.
2. Low-voltage intelligent loop, audio or other fire alarm wiring shall not be run in the same
conduit with alternating current wiring.
3. All fire alarm devices shall be flush mounted in finished areas and surface mounted in
unfinished areas.
4. Cable and wiring sizing and construction type shall be in accordance with Division 26, and
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
5. All junction boxes and pull boxes shall be painted red and covers marked “FIRE ALARM”
in one inch (1”) high letters. All conduit fitting covers shall be painted red. Contractor shall
use a red color that matches existing fire alarm boxes and conduit.
6. Wiring shall be continuous between fire panel and all field devices, with no splices or “tee”
taps allowed.
7. Fire alarm, signaling, and control conductors shall only be terminated at fire alarm and
control equipment or in labeled fire alarm terminal cabinets with labeled terminal strips.
Splices or terminations within junction boxes shall not be permitted.
8. Identify cables and conductors at each connection point with tags similar to Brady B-
500+/600. Individual conductors which are part of a cable assembly may be identified by
color code.
G. Label branch circuit breakers which feed fire alarm system equipment “Fire Alarm System”, and
install locking devices which prevent breakers from being inadvertently turned off but which do
not interfere with automatic breaker operation.
H. Install draftstop material at penetrations in partitions not required to be firestopped.
I. Program the site proprietary fire alarm system to accept the new system and display information
consistent with the existing fire alarm systems on site.
J. Provide services of Honeywell technicians to oversee installation, assist in locating detectors,
supervise final connections, energize control equipment, make adjustments, perform
manufacturer’s recommended field testing and acceptance testing.
K. Record optical performance of each fiber optic strand used in the fire alarm reporting and
communications loop (Honeywell XLS-NET) connecting the M and N Building fire alarm
control panels with the adjacent network nodes using an optical time-domain reflectometer
(OTDR).

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 31 00 - 8
3.3 FIELD TESTS
A. Prior to formally demonstrating the fire alarm system to the owner and the authority having
jurisdictions, test each component part of the system and each programmed sequence of
operations in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Measure and report alarm sound levels in locations chosen and provide additional appliances as
required to achieve alarm sound levels in accordance with governing codes. Provision of
additional appliances shall not constitute grounds for change orders.
C. Formal field tests shall be performed under the supervision of a factory-trained field technician
in the presence of the Owner’s Representatives. Tests shall be performed on each circuit and
device of the system (one hundred percent [100%] test). On any circuit where malfunctions
occur, the defective device within the malfunctioning circuit shall be repaired and retested. A
comprehensive field test report shall be given to the Owner upon completion of the test.
D. The fire alarm system shall be one hundred percent (100%) informally tested and all system
malfunctions corrected before the Owner is advised that any formal acceptance testing is ready
to begin. A preliminary test report listing each device tested shall be given to the Owner before
formal acceptance testing is scheduled. The report shall outline the results of the preliminary
testing, and any problems encountered and/or repaired.
E. All formal and informal testing performed on the Fire Alarm System shall be documented by the
Contractor in hard copy format. Testing documentation shall include a listing of each device
and/or zone tested and a listing of the associated manufacturer’s point/zone number for the
device and/or zone tested. The documentation shall also include a column or area for each
device outlining the test comments for that device and the date when the device was tested. The
actual test format to be used shall be submitted to the Owner thirty (30) days before testing is
scheduled to begin. The format shall outline the proposed testing documentation to be utilized
for the project. No formal testing shall be permitted until the itemized testing documentation
format is submitted. A log of all test results shall be furnished in written form via Graphic
Central of all field devices.
F. Provide all personnel and equipment to perform all informal and formal acceptance testing and
test reporting. The Owner’s Representative will act in an observation role only with reference to
formal system testing.
G. Final acceptance of the system will not be considered by the Owner until all punch list items
have been corrected. Beneficial use of the system will not be considered as full or partial
acceptance.
H. Arrange and perform demonstration under direction of authorities having jurisdiction. Arrange
for A/E and O/R to be present to witness testing.
I. Provide 2 sessions of 4 hours each of training for personnel responsible for operation and
maintenance of the fire alarm and detection system.
3.4 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE
A. Guarantee all wiring and equipment for the new fire alarm system to be free of defects in
workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance by the
Owner.
B. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner a preventative maintenance contract for the system
with four (4) hour guaranteed emergency response service at the time of system acceptance.
Four (4) hour emergency response service shall be applicable during normal contractor working
hours. Twelve (12) hour emergency response service shall be provided during after-hour and
week-end periods. This contract shall be provided gratis to the Owner for the first year.

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 31 00 - 9
3.5 FIRE ALARM ZONE SCHEDULES
A. The system supplier shall be responsible for updating the zone schedules for the Building F fire
alarm system and for revising alpha-numeric display messages on remote annunciator panels
associated with renovated areas and for updating descriptions of building areas and room names
in accordance with new floor plan.
B. Zone schedules shall be formulated for each input and output point on the project. Input points
shall describe the point and area location in full English, non-abbreviated format.
C. Output zone schedules shall list each audible and visual output required for the project plus all
other outputs required such as audible and visual devices, etc.
D. Zone schedules for all input and output points shall be provided with the original submittals as
outlined in Article “Submittals”.

END OF SECTION

10060811 Bristol-Myers Squibb June 5, 2018


Module M & N - Addendum 6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 31 00 - 10